You are on page 1of 153

TSE SUPPLY FOR GREEN RIYADH PROGRAM

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION


BASIS OF DESIGN

Aconex Document No.: GRP-08-TS000-ILF-TEC-RPT-00001 Rev01


12.01.2022 TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001 | Revision 01 ©

ILF CONSULTING ENGINEERS FOR ENGINEERING CONSULTANCY


Prince Muhammad Bin Abdulaziz, Road, Olaya Towers, Tower B, 11th Floor, P.O. Box 10311, 11433 Riyadh
Phone.: +966 / 11 / 465 4145 | Fax: +966 / 11 / 464 4616
Email: ilf.ksa@ilf.com | www.ilf.com
TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

REVISIONS

01 12.01.2022 Second Revision Team M.I. D.C.

00 16.12.2021 First issue Team M.I. D.C.

REV. DATE ISSUE, MODIFICATION PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 1/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 14
1.1 Background ........................................................................................................ 14
1.2 Objectives .......................................................................................................... 16
1.3 Scope ................................................................................................................. 16
1.4 Stakeholders ...................................................................................................... 17
1.5 References......................................................................................................... 18

2 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 19
2.1 Project Description ............................................................................................. 19
2.2 Applicable Codes and Standards ....................................................................... 20
2.3 Definitions .......................................................................................................... 22
2.3.1 General Terms ................................................................................................... 22
2.3.2 Pressure in Systems .......................................................................................... 23
2.3.3 Pressure Definition for the Elements of the System ............................................ 23
2.3.4 Diameters........................................................................................................... 23
2.3.5 Measuring Units ................................................................................................. 24
2.3.6 Meteorological and Seismic Design Data ........................................................... 25
2.4 Design Period..................................................................................................... 26
2.5 Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 26
2.6 Procurement ...................................................................................................... 27
2.7 Permits ............................................................................................................... 28
2.8 Operational Concept .......................................................................................... 29
2.8.1 Operational Modes ............................................................................................. 29
2.8.2 Redundancies for Emergency Scenarios............................................................ 29
2.8.3 Equipment Redundancies .................................................................................. 30
2.9 Tagging .............................................................................................................. 31
2.9.1 Tagging Logic..................................................................................................... 31
2.9.2 System Code...................................................................................................... 32
2.9.3 Location Code .................................................................................................... 32
2.9.4 Equipment and Subsequent Equipment - Code 3 and 4 ..................................... 33
2.9.5 SCADA Alarm and Events – Code 5 .................................................................. 35

3 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS................................................... 36


3.1 General .............................................................................................................. 36
3.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 36
3.2 Pad Footings ...................................................................................................... 36

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 2/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

3.3 Raft Foundations ................................................................................................ 36


3.4 Bearing Resistance on Rock .............................................................................. 37
3.5 Bearing Resistance and Settlement on Granular Material .................................. 37
3.6 Serviceability Limit State requirements ............................................................... 37

4 ROAD DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 38


4.1 General .............................................................................................................. 38
4.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 38
4.2 General Considerations...................................................................................... 38
4.3 Design Codes and Standards............................................................................. 39
4.4 Geometric Design .............................................................................................. 39
4.5 Design Vehicle ................................................................................................... 39
4.6 Design Speed..................................................................................................... 39
4.7 Stopping Sight Distance ..................................................................................... 39
4.8 Traffic Signs ....................................................................................................... 39
4.9 Pavement Design ............................................................................................... 40
4.9.1 Design Parameters ............................................................................................ 40
4.9.2 Determination of Pavement Layers Thicknesses ................................................ 40

5 CIVIL AND HYRAULIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 42


5.1 General .............................................................................................................. 42
5.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 42
5.2 Pipe Layout and Routing .................................................................................... 42
5.2.1 General Considerations...................................................................................... 42
5.2.2 Right of Way Requirements................................................................................ 43
5.2.3 Other Utility Crossings........................................................................................ 43
5.3 Pipeline Sizing.................................................................................................... 44
5.3.1 TSE Demand...................................................................................................... 44
5.3.2 Peaks Flows ....................................................................................................... 44
5.3.3 Minimum Pipe Diameter ..................................................................................... 44
5.3.4 Minimum and Maximum Pressure ...................................................................... 44
5.3.5 Velocities............................................................................................................ 45
5.3.6 Pipe Friction Factors .......................................................................................... 46
5.3.7 Water Losses/ Leakages .................................................................................... 46
5.3.8 Head Losses Calculation .................................................................................... 47
5.3.9 Local Head Losses ............................................................................................. 48
5.4 Hydraulic Design ................................................................................................ 48
5.4.1 Elements of the Hydraulic Modelling Task .......................................................... 49

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 3/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.4.2 Calculation Scenarios......................................................................................... 50


5.4.3 Surge/ Water Hammer Analysis ......................................................................... 51
5.5 Pipelines ............................................................................................................ 51
5.5.1 Material Selection ............................................................................................... 51
5.5.2 Mechanical Design of TSE Network ................................................................... 52
5.5.3 External Corrosion Protection............................................................................. 53
5.5.4 Pipeline Interior Lining ........................................................................................ 56
5.5.5 Construction Methods ........................................................................................ 56
5.5.6 Other Considerations ......................................................................................... 59
5.5.7 Chambers and Manholes ................................................................................... 60
5.5.8 Pipelines Surge Control...................................................................................... 60
5.6 Pumping Stations ............................................................................................... 60
5.6.1 General .............................................................................................................. 60
5.6.2 Utilities ............................................................................................................... 61
5.6.3 Facility Requirements ......................................................................................... 61
5.7 TSE Storage ...................................................................................................... 61
5.7.1 General .............................................................................................................. 61
5.7.2 Storage Tanks Materials .................................................................................... 62
5.7.3 Capacity ............................................................................................................. 62
5.8 Drainage ............................................................................................................ 63

6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 64


6.1 General .............................................................................................................. 64
6.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 64
6.2 Design Loads ..................................................................................................... 64
6.2.1 Dead Loads ........................................................................................................ 64
6.2.2 Superimposed Dead Loads ................................................................................ 65
6.2.3 Live Loads.......................................................................................................... 65
6.2.4 Sand Loads ........................................................................................................ 66
6.2.5 Wind Loads ........................................................................................................ 66
6.2.6 Seismic Loads .................................................................................................... 67
6.2.7 Temperature Loads ............................................................................................ 67
6.2.8 Groundwater Criteria .......................................................................................... 67
6.2.9 Soil Lateral Loads .............................................................................................. 67
6.2.10 Construction Loads ............................................................................................ 67
6.3 Load Combinations ............................................................................................ 67
6.3.1 Ultimate Limit State (ULS) Design Design .......................................................... 67

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 4/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

6.3.2 Serviceability Limit State (SLS) Design .............................................................. 68


6.4 Materials ............................................................................................................ 68
6.4.1 Design Life ......................................................................................................... 68
6.4.2 Concrete ............................................................................................................ 68
6.4.3 Reinforcement Material ...................................................................................... 69
6.4.4 Steelwork ........................................................................................................... 70
6.5 Serviceability Performance ................................................................................. 71
6.5.1 Steelwork Deflection Limits ................................................................................ 71
6.5.2 Concrete Deflection Limits.................................................................................. 72
6.5.3 Structures Movement Joints ............................................................................... 73

7 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 74


7.1 General .............................................................................................................. 74
7.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 75
7.2 Operation Buildings ............................................................................................ 75
7.2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 75
7.2.2 Floors ................................................................................................................. 76
7.2.3 Battery Room ..................................................................................................... 76
7.3 Pump House ...................................................................................................... 76
7.4 Other Buildings................................................................................................... 77
7.4.1 Guard House ...................................................................................................... 77
7.4.2 Warehouse Building ........................................................................................... 77
7.4.3 Workshop Building ............................................................................................. 78
7.4.4 Laboratory Building ............................................................................................ 78
7.4.5 Emergency Generator Container ........................................................................ 79
7.4.6 Electrical Substation Building ............................................................................. 79
7.5 Staffing of Buildings and Sites ............................................................................ 80
7.6 Fire Resistance .................................................................................................. 80
7.6.1 Fire Resistance Ratings ..................................................................................... 80

8 MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 81


8.1 General .............................................................................................................. 81
8.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................... 81
8.2 Pumping Stations ............................................................................................... 82
8.2.1 General Criteria .................................................................................................. 82
8.2.2 Pump Selection .................................................................................................. 83
8.2.3 Pumping Unit Set-Up.......................................................................................... 84
8.2.4 Design and Performance Requirements ............................................................. 84

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 5/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

8.2.5 Fire Fighting Pumps ........................................................................................... 85


8.3 Station Piping ..................................................................................................... 85
8.3.1 Sizing of Station Piping System .......................................................................... 85
8.3.2 Materials for Station Piping................................................................................. 86
8.3.3 Internal Lining of Station Piping .......................................................................... 86
8.3.4 External Coating of Station Piping ...................................................................... 86
8.3.5 Piping Layout ..................................................................................................... 86
8.3.6 Piping Flexibility ................................................................................................. 86
8.3.7 Dismantling Pieces and Flange Adaptors ........................................................... 87
8.3.8 Pump Suction Piping .......................................................................................... 87
8.3.9 Filling and Drainage ........................................................................................... 87
8.3.10 Strainers............................................................................................................. 87
8.4 Valves ................................................................................................................ 88
8.4.1 General Design Guidelines................................................................................. 88
8.4.2 Isolation Valves .................................................................................................. 89
8.4.3 Washout Valves ................................................................................................. 91
8.4.4 Station Piping Valves ......................................................................................... 91
8.5 Mechanical Lifting .............................................................................................. 93
8.5.1 Electrical Overhead Travelling Crane (EOT) ...................................................... 94
8.5.2 Electrical Requirements ..................................................................................... 94
8.6 HVAC ................................................................................................................. 94
8.6.1 Design Criteria for Indoor Located Air-Conditioning Units ................................... 94
8.6.2 Design Criteria for Outdoor Located Air-Conditioning Units ................................ 95
8.6.3 Air Temperature and Humidity ............................................................................ 96
8.6.4 General Requirements ....................................................................................... 97
8.6.5 Air System.......................................................................................................... 98
8.6.6 Air Velocity in HVAC Ducting System ................................................................. 98
8.6.7 Water Velocity in Chilled Water System ............................................................. 99
8.6.8 Heat Transmission Data ..................................................................................... 99
8.6.9 Ventilation Air ................................................................................................... 100
8.6.10 Space Pressurization ....................................................................................... 100
8.6.11 Air Filtration ...................................................................................................... 100
8.6.12 Air Flow Velocities ............................................................................................ 100
8.6.13 Packaged Air Conditioning Units ...................................................................... 101
8.6.14 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management ........................................................ 101

9 ELECTRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 102

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 6/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

9.1 General ............................................................................................................ 102


9.1.1 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................. 102
9.2 General Arrangement and Electrical Points of Interface ................................... 103
9.3 Voltage ............................................................................................................. 104
9.4 Frequency and Power Factor ........................................................................... 104
9.5 Classification of Loads ..................................................................................... 104
9.6 Voltage Drop .................................................................................................... 104
9.7 MV Gas Insulated System (GIS)....................................................................... 105
9.8 33 kV Cable Links ............................................................................................ 105
9.9 Power Supply from Electricity Provider ............................................................. 105
9.10 Power Transformers ......................................................................................... 106
9.11 Medium Voltage (MV) Distribution .................................................................... 106
9.12 Distribution Transformers ................................................................................. 106
9.13 Low Voltage (LV) Distribution ........................................................................... 106
9.14 Circuit Breakers................................................................................................ 107
9.15 Electrical Motors............................................................................................... 107
9.16 Variable Speed Drive ....................................................................................... 107
9.17 Medium Voltage Reactive Power Compensation Equipment ............................ 108
9.18 Cables .............................................................................................................. 108
9.19 Lighting ............................................................................................................ 109
9.20 Emergency Generator Set ................................................................................ 109
9.21 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) ............................................................... 110
9.22 Earthing............................................................................................................ 110
9.23 Cathodic Protection .......................................................................................... 110
9.23.1 Station CPS ..................................................................................................... 110
9.23.2 Storage Tanks CPS.......................................................................................... 111
9.23.3 Pipeline CPS .................................................................................................... 111
9.23.4 Temporary CPS ............................................................................................... 111
9.24 Lightning Protection.......................................................................................... 111

10 INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 113


10.1 General ............................................................................................................ 113
10.1.1 Basic requirements .......................................................................................... 113
10.1.2 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs) ......................................................... 113
10.1.3 Engineering Deliverables ................................................................................. 114
10.1.4 Instrument Installation ...................................................................................... 114
10.1.5 Instrument Connection ..................................................................................... 115

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 7/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10.1.6 Instrument Valve Manifold ................................................................................ 115


10.1.7 Accuracy .......................................................................................................... 115
10.1.8 Range .............................................................................................................. 115
10.1.9 Signal Transmission ......................................................................................... 115
10.1.10 Cabling Requirement........................................................................................ 115
10.1.11 Power Supply ................................................................................................... 116
10.1.12 Grounding Systems .......................................................................................... 116
10.2 Monitoring and SCADA .................................................................................... 116
10.2.1 Operation Philosophy ....................................................................................... 116
10.2.2 General Requirements ..................................................................................... 117
10.2.3 Tasks of Operators MCC .................................................................................. 117
10.2.4 Tasks of Operators SCS .................................................................................. 118
10.2.5 Operation of Neighbourhood Tank Stations...................................................... 119
10.3 Control Functions at MCC, SCS and PLCs ...................................................... 119
10.3.1 Local – Off – Remote Switches ........................................................................ 119
10.3.2 Automated Sequences ..................................................................................... 120
10.3.3 Flow Path Monitoring........................................................................................ 120
10.3.4 Water Demand Forecasts ................................................................................ 121
10.3.5 Online Mass Balances (Leak Detection) and Quality Tracking ......................... 121
10.3.6 Flow and Pressure Control ............................................................................... 121
10.3.7 ESD System SCS systems............................................................................... 122
10.3.8 Maintenance Overrides for Fire Detectors ........................................................ 122
10.3.9 Communication System ................................................................................... 123
10.3.10 SCADA Systems .............................................................................................. 123
10.3.11 Process Control and Architecture ..................................................................... 126
10.3.12 Flowmeters ...................................................................................................... 126
10.3.13 Pressure Sensors............................................................................................. 126
10.3.14 Level ................................................................................................................ 127
10.3.15 Temperature .................................................................................................... 127
10.3.16 Motor Operated Valves .................................................................................... 127
10.3.17 TSE Quality Monitoring .................................................................................... 127
10.4 Instrumentation for Security.............................................................................. 131
10.4.1 General ............................................................................................................ 131
10.5 CCTV at Pump Stations ................................................................................... 132
10.6 Access Control and Intruder Detection System ................................................ 132

11 FIRE FIGHTING PHILOSOPHY ....................................................................... 133

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 8/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

11.1 General ............................................................................................................ 133


11.2 Level of Protection – Fire Detection.................................................................. 133
11.3 Level of Protection – Fire Fighting .................................................................... 133
11.4 Support for Local Fire Fighting Forces.............................................................. 134

12 UTILITY CONNECTIONS ................................................................................ 135

13 TSE QUALITY IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES................................................ 136

14 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 137


14.1 General ............................................................................................................ 137
14.2 Noise Regulations ............................................................................................ 137
14.3 Air Quality Regulations ..................................................................................... 137
14.4 Wastewater/ TSE Treatment Effluents ............................................................. 138
14.5 Waste ............................................................................................................... 140

TABLES
Table 1: Project Documents .................................................................................................18
Table 2: Measuring Units......................................................................................................24
Table 3: Design Data ............................................................................................................25
Table 4: Rain Intensity ..........................................................................................................26
Table 5: Design and Construction Periods............................................................................26
Table 6: Entities Involved in this Project ...............................................................................26
Table 7: Operations Periods and Design Flows ....................................................................29
Table 8: Letter Codes for Instrumentation.............................................................................34
Table 9: Serviceability Limit State for Shallow Foundations ..................................................37
Table 10: Residual Pressure ................................................................................................45
Table 11: Pipe Velocities ......................................................................................................45
Table 12: Pipe Roughness, Friction Factors and Losses ......................................................46
Table 13: Typical k Values ...................................................................................................48
Table 14: Recommended Material Selection for RCRC TSE Distribution Network ................51
Table 15: Non-Immersed, Aggressive Conditions .................................................................54
Table 16: Immersed (Non-Potable) Conditions .....................................................................54
Table 17: Non-Immersed Non-Aggressive Conditions ..........................................................55
Table 18: Immersed in Potable water ...................................................................................55
Table 19: Storage Criteria ....................................................................................................62
Table 20: Dead Loads ..........................................................................................................64
Table 21: Superimposed Dead Loads ..................................................................................65

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 9/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 22: Live Loads ............................................................................................................66


Table 23: Wind Loads...........................................................................................................66
Table 24: Temperature Loads ..............................................................................................67
Table 25: Construction Loads ...............................................................................................67
Table 26: Grade of Concrete ................................................................................................68
Table 27: Concrete Cover ....................................................................................................69
Table 28: Concrete Properties ..............................................................................................69
Table 29: Reinforcement Material .........................................................................................69
Table 30: Concrete Crack Width...........................................................................................70
Table 31: Structural Steel Designation and Strength ............................................................71
Table 32: Structural Steel Serviceability ...............................................................................71
Table 33: Concrete Steel Serviceability ................................................................................72
Table 34: Maximum Water Velocity ......................................................................................89
Table 35: Pressures .............................................................................................................90
Table 36: Recommended Washout Valve Minimum Diameters According to Pipe Size ........91
Table 37: HVAC Indoor Design Condition.............................................................................94
Table 38: Velocity of Air and Friction Rate in the Duct ..........................................................98
Table 39: Filter Efficiencies ................................................................................................100
Table 40: Maximum Air Flow Velocities ..............................................................................100
Table 41: Illumination Level ................................................................................................109
Table 42: Type of Signals ...................................................................................................115
Table 43: Manning and Staffing of MCC and SCS locations ...............................................117
Table 44: Automated Sequences .......................................................................................120
Table 45: Imposed TSE Quality Monitoring Parameter of Royal Decree No, M/6 ...............128
Table 46: TSE Sampling Strategy.......................................................................................130
Table 47: PME 2012 - Free Field External Noise Limits for Community Noise ....................137
Table 48: Industrial Units in ‘Industrial Areas’ - Maximum Permissible Free-field Noise Levels
...........................................................................................................................................137
Table 49: Non-Road Petrol (Compression-Ignition) Engines (includes industrial equipment)
...........................................................................................................................................138
Table 50: Non-Road Diesel (Spark-ignition Engines) (lawn-mowers, forklifts, generators)..138
Table 51: Maximum Pollution Levels of Tertiary Treated Sewage Water ............................139

FIGURES
Figure 1: Overview of Proposed TSE Main Lines for Each Lot .............................................15
Figure 2: Locations of Existing WWTP .................................................................................15
Figure 3: SCS Overview .....................................................................................................119

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 10/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

APPENDICES
Appendix 1: TSE System Schematic ..................................................................................141

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 11/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

ABBREVIATIONS

AASHTOAmerican Association of State F&G ...................................... Fire and Gas


Highway and Transportation Officials FOC ............................... Fiber Optic Cable
ACB.............................. Air Circuit Breaker GDD.......................... Gross Daily Demand
ACI ................ American Concrete Institute GIS ................... MV Gas Insulated System
ADA-ABAAmericans with Disabilities Act GPRS ........ General Packet Radio Service
and Architectural Barriers Act GRS .......................Green Riyadh Strategy
Accessibility HI .................................. Hydraulic Institute
AHRIAir-Conditioning, Heating, and HMI ................... Human-Machine Interface
Refrigeration Institute HSSD...... High Sensitive Smoke Detection
AISCAmerican Institute of Steel HVACHeating, Ventilation and Air-
Construction Conditioning
AISI ........ American Iron and Steel Institute ID ...................................... Inside Diameter
AMCAAir Movement and Control IECInternational Electrotechnical
Association Commission
ANSIAmerican National Standards Institute IEEEInstitute of Electrical and Electronics
API ............... American Petroleum Institute Engineers
ASB .......................Auxiliary Service Board ISAInstrumentation, Systems, and
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers Automation Society
ASHRAEAmerican Society of Heating, ISOInternational Organization for
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Standardization
Engineers KSA ................... Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
ASMEAmerican Society of Mechanical LF ....................................... Losses Factor
Engineers LOR ......................... Local – Off – Remote
ASSEAmerican Society of Safety LV .......................................... Low Voltage
Professionals MAWP Maximum Allowable Work Pressure
ASTMAmerican Society for Testing and MCB.................... Miniature Circuit Breaker
Materials MCC .......................... Main Control Center
AWS ................. American Welding Society MCCB ........ Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
AWWAAmerican Water Works Association MDB...................... Main Distribution Board
BOD ................................. Basis of Design MDP................ Maximum Design Pressure
BOQ ................................ Bill Of Quantities MMSManufacturers Standardization
BP ...................................... Burst Pressure Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
BS EN .... British Standard European Norm MOV ......................... Motor Operate Valve
CCTV ................. Closed Circuit Television MV ................................... Medium Voltage
CMAACrane Manufacturers Association of NACENational Association of Corrosion
America Engineers
CMS ............. Condition Monitoring System NEMANational Electrical Manufacturers
CP ................................ Connection Points Association
CPS.............. Cathodic Protection Systems NFPA .National Fire Protection Association
CT ............................. Current Transformer NHT ........................ Neighbourhood Tanks
DC ................................ Design Consultant NISTNational Institute of Standards and
DD ....................................... Daily Demand Technology
DIN .................. Deutsche Industrial Norms NTP ............................ Operating Pressure
DN ................................. Nominal Diameter OD ................................. Outside Diameter
DP ................................... Design Pressure P&IDPiping and Instrumentation Diagram,
DWAGerman Association for Water, Piping and Instrument Diagram
Wastewater and Waste PEA ............. Allowable Site Test Pressure
EMG ....................... Emergency Generator PFA............. Allowable Operating Pressure
EN ............................. European Standards PFI ...................... Pipe Fabrication Institute
EOT. Electrical Overhead Travelling Crane PLC........... Programmable Logic Controller

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 12/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

PM...................................... Primary Mains SP ...................................Service Pressure


PMC ........Project Management Consultant SSPC ..... Steel Structures Painting Council
PMEPresidency of Meteorology and ST ..................................... Strategic Tanks
Environment SWL ............................ Safe Working Load
PN ................................. Nominal Pressure TIATelecommunications Industry
PRSVPressure Reducing and Sustaining Association
Valves TP ..........................Network Test Pressure
QoL ..................................... Quality of Life TSETreated Sewage Effluent, Treated
RCRC .. Royal Commission for Riyadh City Sewage Effluent
RTD.... Resistance Temperature Detectors UCS ......................... Unit Control Systems
SASOSaudi Arabian Standard ULS............................. Ultimate Limit State
Organization UPS ............Uninterruptable Power Supply
SBC........................... Saudi Building Code VCB ..................... Vaccum Circuit Breaker
SCS..................... Station Control Systems VMSVibration Monitoring System, Vibration
SDB...................... Sub-distribution Boards Monitoring System
SEC..................... Saudi Electric Company VSD ......................... Variable Speed Drive
SLS .....................Serviceability Limit State VT ............................. Voltage Transformer
SM.................................. Secondary Mains WWTPWastewater Treatment Plant,
SMACNASheet Metal and Air Conditioning Wastewater Treatment Plant
Contractors National Association

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 13/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
The Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE (240,000 m3/day)) represents approximately
16% of the overall generated effluent in Riyadh City. Most of the TSE is produced
from Manfouha Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP). The other two plants in
operation (Heet and Al-Hair) contribute to some extent to the TSE supply.
The Green Riyadh Program now has a significant impact on the increase of TSE
in Riyadh City. TSE will be the main source for the irrigation of the numerous
planned greening projects. A volume of 1 million m3/day of TSE is reserved, serving
the Green Riyadh Strategy needs in the year 2030.
Until the year 2030, the implementation of the Green Riyadh Strategy (GRS)
Program.
At the same time, the Green Strategy represents a major investment program
comprising the implementation of various greening opportunities. The final target
is to increase today’s green area coverage of 91 km2 to 541 km2 in the year 2030.
The project has been divided into three (3) Lots. For each lot, one Design
Consultant will be assigned to complete the tasks for the detailed design of a
hydraulically independent TSE distribution network, followed by construction later.
Each lot include Main Pipelines, pumping stations, connections to Strategic TSE
Reservoirs, connections to Secondary Mains, Strategic TSE Reservoirs,
Neighbourhood Tanks, TSE treatment facilities if required, filling stations, and any
other facility that can be required for the operation of the systems. The Main
Pipelines for each lot are shown in Figure 1.
The TSE supply for the greening projects is generated at the location of the existing
three WWTPs in Riyadh (see Figure 2), from where it has to be conveyed to the
irrigation project sites via the conveyance and storage network.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 14/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Figure 1: Overview of Proposed TSE Main Lines for Each Lot

Figure 2: Locations of Existing WWTP

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 15/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

1.2 Objectives
The purpose of this document is to define the Client’s requirements related to the
Basis of Design (BOD) of the three (3) Design Consultants (DC) appointed to carry
out detailed engineering.
The document, therefore, provides the technical approach toward similar topics for
each lot that must be harmonized and the requirements that must be formulated in
a similar manner for each lot. Topics that are addressed are (but are not limited to)
design philosophy and design criteria (expected lifetime, redundancy, safety
margin, material selection, etc.), TSE supply, demand, and quality, and cost
estimates.
Considering the involvement of multiple entities with specific design, the respective
tasks that require utmost attention by Client/ Project Management Consultant
(PMC and must be taken into account to guarantee consistency in design and
implementation are summarized below: below:
▪ Establishment of the uniform basis of design;
▪ Establishment of uniform project specifications;
▪ Identify which installations require design consistency or standardization;
▪ Identify to which level consistency or standardizations are required;
▪ Establish clear interfaces and assure proper management of those;
▪ Provide overall requirements to ensure consistency in engineering
deliverables. Such requirements include:
» Electronic document format and computer-aided design software;
» Communication protocols;
» Uniform document/drawing templates;
» Use similar standard typical drawings;
» Uniform tag numbering system.

1.3 Scope
The scope of this report is to facilitate a common project understanding between
RCRC and the three Design Consultants that carry out the detailed engineering of
Lot 1, Lot 2 and Lot 3.
This is achieved by first establishing a common operating philosophy of the overall
system with the intention to harmonise the design and construction/ operation of
all three lots. Subsequently, the key design parameters for the systems to be
designed are defined, broken down into the main design disciplines.
It is considered that this document is the basis for all designs to be completed as
part of this project. During the progression of the designs, it may become
necessary to adapt or expand this document, which will be done in coordination
with the DCs.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 16/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

1.4 Stakeholders
As with all projects being completed in an established urban area, the coordination
with and approval by all relevant stakeholders is critical during design to avoid
delays during construction.
The internal stakeholders are:

Client Royal Commission for Riyadh City “RCRC”

PMC Consultant ILF Consulting Engineers for Engineering


Consultancy (ILF)

PMO Consultant Egis International

Design Consultant Contractor for the Detail Design Services

Construction Contractor Contractor for the Construction Works

The main external stakeholders are:

National Water Company Supplier of TSE, owner of major water and


(NWC) wastewater infrastructure in Riyadh

Saudi Irrigation Organisation Owner and operator of existing and future


(SIO) irrigation infrastructure in Riyadh

Saline Water Conversion Owner of major underground infrastructure in


Company (SWCC) Riyadh

King Salman Park (KSP) Developer of irrigation project and the single
largest consumer of TSE in the network

Saudi Electricity Company Electric energy company of Saudi Arabia


(SEC)

Riyadh City Municipality Organization and coordination of the city.


(AMANA)

Ministry of Communications Responsible for all communication and


and Information Technology information technology means in the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia.

King Khalid International Hosting regional and international passenger


Airport and cargo services.

General Authority of Civil The General Authority of Civil Aviation of Saudi


Aviation - Saudi Arabia Arabia is responsible for the regulation of air
(GACA) transport services and the implementation of
civil air regulations, air safety and
airworthiness standards.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 17/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Ministry of Defence Responsible for the protection of the national


security, interests and sovereignty of the
country from external threats, as well as
working with all ministries of the state to
achieve national security and stability.

Ministry of Transport and Designs, implements, and maintains road


Logistics Services works.

Ministry of Interior Responsible for national security,


naturalization, immigration and customs in
Saudi Arabia.

Ministry of Environment, Water To achieve sustainability of the environment


and Agriculture (MEWA) and natural resources in such a manner that
would ensure water security, contribute to
achieving food security, and improve quality of
life in KSA.

Saudi Arabia Railways (SAR) Entity concerned with providing transportation


and logistics solutions.

Saudi ARAMCO Saudi Arabia oil, gas and petrochemical


company.

Internet Providers Internet providers that maintain physical


networks in the greater Riyadh area include
but may not be limited to Bayanat (Bayanat Al
Oula for Network Services), Detecon Al-
Saudia Co. Ltd (DETASAD), Etisalat (UAE
VPN connections provider), GO Telecom
(Etihad Atheeb Telecom), Integrated Telecom
Company (ITC), (Etihad Etisalat Company)
Mobily, Saudi Telecom Company (STC), Zain.

1.5 References
In this document, references have been made to the following documents:
Table 1: Project Documents
Reference No. Reference Title
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-PM-STD-00001 Project Description
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-GN-LST-00001 List of Applicable Codes and Standards
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-IC-BOD-00002 SCADA Concept Report
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002 TSE Main Distribution System Option 5
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-PP-TNT-00003 Technical Note - Pipeline Material

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 18/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

2 GENERAL
2.1 Project Description
The project has been divided into three lots, the first covering the north and east
side of the City, the second covering the west side of the city and the third one the
south part of the city. The main components for each lot, as was described in the
Request for Proposal, are described below.
Lot 1-East: Consultant 1 (TSE Distribution Network East):
▪ Primary Main from the Strategic Reservoir at the Cement Factory
(WT_RCRC_09) to the storage tank at King Salman Park (WT_RCRC_15);
▪ Review of the detail design of the constructed and unconstructed sections of
the NWC TSE transmission system consisting of:
» Pumping stations PS_NWC_S1 and PS_NWC_S2 located at Manfouha
WWTP;
» NWC S1 and NWC S2 pipelines from Manfouha to Princess Noura
University (PNU), including constructed and planned connections at these
pipelines.
▪ Short connection of the NWC S1 / NWC S2 pipelines to the new water tank
WT_RCRC_17 at the planned Airport Park;
▪ Short connection from NWC S1 and NWS2 pipelines to the Strategic Reservoir
at the Cement Factory (WT_RCRC_09);
▪ New Primary Main from Manfouha WWTP to the Strategic Reservoir at the
Cement Factory (WT_RCRC_09), if required (not included in the TSE
Distribution Network);
▪ Secondary Main 1 pipelines of pressure zone 7 connected to one or two of
these primary mains NWC S1 and NWC S2;
▪ Secondary Main 1 pipelines of pressure zone 2 connected to the primary main
or reservoirs located in Zone 2;
▪ Connections of the Secondary Mains 1 to the Primary Mains or water
tanks/reservoirs;
▪ Strategic Reservoir at the Cement Factory (WT_RCRC_09);
▪ Storage Tank WT_RCRC_17 at the Airport Park;
▪ The pumping station at the Strategic Reservoir at the Cement Factory
(PS_RCRC_09);
▪ Neighbourhood tanks in Zone 2 and 7;
▪ Decentralised further TSE treatment systems located in Zone 2 and Zone 7;
▪ Any other facilities which are required for the operation of the system.
Lot 2-West: Consultant 2 (TSE Distribution Network West):
▪ Primary main from new pumping station (PS_RCRC_14) at Manfouha
Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) to the storage tank (WT_RCRC_15) in
the King Salman Park (KSP);
▪ Secondary Mains 1 of Zone 4;
▪ Secondary Mains 1 of Zone 3;
▪ Connections of the Secondary Mains 1 to the Primary Mains or water
tanks/reservoirs;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 19/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ The pumping station at Manfouha WWTP (PS_RCRC_14);


▪ The pumping station at Aruba Strategic Reservoir (PS_RCRC_08);
▪ Pumping stations at the storage tank in the King Salman Park (PS_RCRC_07
and PS_RCRC_10);
▪ Pumping station (PS_RCRC_08) at the Strategic Reservoir (WT_RCRC_10)
in the Aruba Park;
▪ Water tank/break pressure tank in Zone 4 (WT_RCRC_12);
▪ Strategic reservoir in Arubah Park in Zone 3 (WT_RCRC_10). The park is
currently in the design phase. The designer of the park is informed about the
water tank and pumping station which shall be located in the area of the park;
▪ Storage tank in King Salman Park in Zone 3 (WT_RCRC_15). The park is
currently in the design phase. The designer of the park is informed about the
water tank and pumping station which shall be located in the area of the park;
▪ Neighbourhood tanks in Zone 3 and 4;
▪ Decentralised further TSE treatment systems located in Zone 3 and Zone 4;
▪ Any other facilities which are required for the operation of the system.
Lot 3-South: Consultant 3 (TSE Distribution Network South):
▪ Primary Main from the new pumping station at Al Hair WWTP (PS_RCRC_01)
to Manfouha WWTP;
▪ Primary Main from the new pumping station at Heet WWTP (PS_RCRC_02)
to the Strategic Reservoir at the Cement Factory;
▪ Primary Main from the new pumping station at Heet WWTP (PS_RCRC_03)
to the connection of the Primary Main Al Hair to Manfouha and vice-versa (bi-
directional flow);
▪ The new pumping station at Al Hair WWTP (PS_RCRC_01);
▪ Break Pressure Tank BRT_001;
▪ Secondary Mains 1 of Zone 1;
▪ Connections of the Secondary Mains 1 to the Primary Mains or water
tanks/reservoirs;
▪ Neighbourhood tanks in Zone 1;
▪ Decentralised further TSE treatment systems located in Zone 1;
▪ Any other facilities which are required for the operation of the system.

2.2 Applicable Codes and Standards


The design of the TSE supply projects follows international standards and
established technical regulations. These standards are applied to the various
design fields for process, civil, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation design.
The following standards and regulations have been used as a design basis:
KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia regulations;
ACI American Concrete Institute;
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials;
ADA-ABA Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act
Accessibility Guidelines;
AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 20/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction;


AISI American Iron and Steel Institute;
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association;
ANSI American National Standards Institute;
API American Petroleum Institute;
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers;
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers;
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
ASSE American Society of Safety Professionals;
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials;
AWS American Welding Society;
AWWA American Water Works Association;
BS EN British Standard European Norm;
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America;
DIN Deutsches Institut fuer Normung (German Institute for
Standardisation);
DWA Deutsche Vereinigung für Wasserwirtschaft, Abwasser und Abfall,
formerly Abwassertechnische Vereinigung (German Association for
Water Supply, Wastewater Disposal and Waste;
EN European Standards;
HI Hydraulic Institute;
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission;
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers;
ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society;
ISO International Standardization Organization;
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry;
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers;
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology;
NFPA (American) National Fire Protection Association;
PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute;
PME Presidency of Meteorology and Environment;
SASO Saudi Arabian Standard Organization;
SBC Saudi Building Code;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 21/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

SEC Saudi Electric Company;


SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association;
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council;
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association.

2.3 Definitions
2.3.1 General Terms
▪ Primary Mains (PM) starting from the TSE source at the WWTP and ending
in the Strategic Tank; starting from the TSE source at the WWTP and ending
in the Strategic Tank;
▪ Secondary Mains (SM)can be of several types:
» Start at the Pressure Reducing Valves or Isolation Valves situated on the
Primary Mains, or start at a large strategic or operational water tank;
» End at neighbourhood tanks, at in-line handover, points to large
consumers (flow meter and isolation valve required), or at irrigation tanks.
▪ Neighbourhood Tanks (NHT) will be used to store 24 hours supply for local
irrigation projects;
▪ Strategic Tanks (ST) Typically sized for 48 hours TSE supply of a designated
supply area; TSE supply of a designated supply area;
▪ Connection Points (CP)Means the point where the TSE network system
connects to the WWTPs, water wells or other facilities that will supply the TSE
network system;
▪ Booster Pumping Station: Booster Pumping is situated on the Primary
Pumping Mains or large Secondary Mains;
▪ Primary Pumping Station: Primary Pumping Stations are situated at the
WWTP, Strategic Reservoir or Zone Reservoir.
▪ Secondary Pumping Station: Secondary Pumping Station is situated at the
Zone and Neighbourhood Tanks.
▪ Tertiary Mains: Tertiary Mains start at the Irrigation Tanks and supply
individual projects.
▪ Tertiary Pumping Station: Tertiary Pumping Station is situated downstream
of the Irrigation Tanks.
▪ TSE Distribution Network: The overall distribution network is planned to be
developed based on TSE Reuse Masterplan.
▪ TSE RCRC Distribution Network: The new TSE distribution network is
planned by RCRC.
▪ Wastewater Treatment Plant: Wastewater Treatment Plants are the source
of TSE for use within the TSE distribution System.
▪ Zone Reservoirs: Reservoirs provide 48 hours of storage at high points witch
each zone.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 22/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

2.3.2 Pressure in Systems


The terms currently used to refer to the hydraulic pressures that are requested
from the pipeline or network are as follows:
▪ Pressure Zone: A zone that is a supply area that is characterized by a
maximum pressure level. The pressure zone can have several supplies.
▪ Static Pressure: This is the pressure in a section of pipe when, under load,
the water is at a steady state.
▪ Design Pressure (DP) The higher the static pressure or the maximum
operating pressure in a section of the pipe under the permanent regime,
excluding overpressure due to water hammer.
▪ Maximum Design Pressure (MDP) This is the maximum operating pressure
that can be reached in a section of the pipe under the permanent regime,
considering the fluctuations produced by a possible water hammer. The MDP
corresponds to the value for which the pipe is actually designed.
▪ Network Test Pressure (TP) water tightness and integrity, tightness and
integrity.
▪ Operating Pressure (OP) end point in the supply network.
▪ Service Pressure (SP)installation, with zero flow in the water supply network.
2.3.3 Pressure Definition for the Elements of the System
▪ Allowable Operating Pressure (PFA)PFA ≥ DP).
▪ Maximum Allowable Work Pressure (MAWP) pressure, including water
hammer, that one component is capable of withstanding in service. (MAWP ≥
MDP).
▪ Allowable Site Test Pressure (PEA) pipe integrity and tightness. Integrity
and tightness (PEA ≥ TP).
▪ Burst Pressure (BP) is the pressure that a pressure vessel like a pipe or tube
can handle before rupturing.
▪ Nominal Pressure (PN) reference that relates to a combination of mechanical
and dimensional characteristics of a piping network component. The use of
the PN concept commonly applies to valves and pipes made of plastic
materials and is not generally used for concrete or metal pipes (steel and
ductile or cast iron), except where the latter is joined by flanges, in which case
the PN concept characterizes them.
2.3.4 Diameters
▪ Inside Diameter (ID) average inside diameter of the pipe shank at any given
section.
▪ Outside Diameter (OD) is the average outside diameter of the pipe shank at
any given section.
▪ Nominal Diameter (DN) Numerical designation of the diameter of a
component by a whole number approximately equal to the actual dimension in

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 23/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

millimetres. It can refer to either inside diameter (DN/ID), as well as outside


diameter (DN/OD).
2.3.5 Measuring Units
The international SI-system of measures and weights shall exclusively be used for
documents, correspondence, drawings, instrument scales, workstations, printouts,
etc. Primarily the following shall be used:
Table 2: Measuring Units
Parameter Units
Conductivity Micro Siemens per centimetre uS/cm
Current Ampere (A)
bar,
Differential Pressure
mbar
Energy Consumption kWh
Newton (N),
Force
kilo newton (kN)
Frequency Hz
Head meter water column (mwc)
meter (m),
Length
kilometre (km)
mm,
Level cm,
m
Lube Oil Flow l/min
kg,
Mass gr,
mg
kg/sec,
Mass Flow (general) kg/h,
t/h
Power watt (W),
megawatt (MW),
kilowatt (kW),
mega-volt-ampere (MVA)
Pressure absolute - bar(a),
gauge - bar(g),
millibar - (mbar),
Pascal - (Pa)
Quantity milligram per litre - mg/l,
parts per million - PPM
Salinity practical salinity unit - PSU
parts per thousand - PPT
Temperature degree Celsius (0C)
Temperature Difference Kelvin (K)
Time hour (hr)
minute (min)
second (sec)
Velocity m/sec,
m/min
Volume cubic meter (m³),
liter (l)

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 24/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Parameter Units
Volumetric flow l/min
m3/s or m3/h for a larger quantity
Voltage volt (V)
Weight kilogram (kg),
metric ton (t)
2.3.6 Meteorological and Seismic Design Data
Table 3: Design Data

Data Categories Riyadh


Elevation Above Sea Level, m 608
Station Coordinates: Latitude North 24°42'
Longitude East 46°44'
Ambient Air & Soil Temperatures, (°C):
Average Annual Temperature 27
Average Daily Maximum Temp. (the hottest month) 37
Monthly Normal Max. Temp. (the hottest month) 43
Average Daily Soil Temp. (1 m below grade) 33
Mo. Normal Max. Soil Temp. (1 m below grade) 34
Lowest One-Day Mean Temperature 5
Highest One-Day Mean Temperature 42
Lowest Recorded Temperature -4
Highest Recorded Temperature 49
Summer Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 1% 45
Mean Coincident Wet Bulb Temp. @ 1% 19
Summer Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 44
Mean Coincident Wet Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 19
Summer Design Wet Bulb Temp. @ 1% 21
Mean Coincident Dry Bulb Temp. @ 1% 40
Summer Design Wet Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 20
Mean Coincident Dry Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 41
Summer Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 5% 43
Mean Daily Range 14
Winter Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 99% 5
Wind:
Basic Wind Speed, 3-sec gust, (km/hr) 50 yr 145
Exposure Category C
Prevailing Direction N/SSE
Earthquake Data:
Short Period Acceleration (SS) in %g 0.7
1-Sec Period Acceleration (S1) in %g 0.2
Peak Ground Acceleration (bedrock) in %g (Note 3) 0.17
Site Class Note 2
Precipitation, mm:
Rainfall, Average Annual 116
Rainfall Maximum in 24 hours 70
Rainfall Intensity Note 1
Isokeraunic Levels (days lightning/year) 16
𝐾
Note 1: Rainfall Intensity: 𝐼 = (𝑡+𝑏)

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 25/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Where: I = Rainfall Intensity in mm/hr (in/hr),


t = time of concentration in minutes, and
K & b are non-dimensional coefficients
Table 4: Rain Intensity
K
Frequency b
SI Units
5 yr 2,443 27.5
10 yr 2,941 24.9
25 yr 3,420 23.7
50 yr 3,810 21.0
100 yr 4,300 20.0
Note 2: Site Class D is to be used for preliminary structural analyses only when
geotechnical data is not available.

Note 3: Site-specific seismic studies to determine the site PGA.

Source: Meteorological and Seismic Design Data. Engineering Standard SAES-A-112.


Saudi Aramco. 20 August 2019.

2.4 Design Period


The implementation of the TSE network is broken down into several phases that
reflect the priority of construction. Accordingly, the design works are following the
same priority, with the Phase I works being designed, tendered, and constructed
first. The considered phases are as indicated in Table 5.
Table 5: Design and Construction Periods
Design Horizon Year
Phase I 2020
Phase II 2023
Phase III 2026
Phase IV 2030

2.5 Responsibilities
To better understand the contractual relationships and the roles and
responsibilities, Table 6 summarises the main contractual party.
Table 6: Entities Involved in this Project
Entity Specific Role and Responsibility
Royal Commission for Riyadh City
RCRC Client, owner and beneficiary of the work performed
under this contract.
Green Riyadh Programme
GR The authority that oversees the implementation of the
work, irrigation projects as well as TSE supply projects
Project Management Office
Engineering consultants contracted by RCRC to advise
PMO
GR and oversee the design and construction of the
irrigation works
PMC Project Management Consultant

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 26/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Entity Specific Role and Responsibility


Engineering consultants contracted by RCRC to perform
design review and construction supervision services for
the implementation of the TSE system
Engineering firms contracted by RCRC to design parts of
Design Consultants the TSE network and associated facilities and prepare
tender construction documents
Construction Construction firms contracted by RCRC to build the TSE
Contractors network and associated facilities
Vendors that produce certain equipment and pipes that
may have long procurement durations and where a
Material Suppliers
stand-alone contract for advance procurement is
proposed to minimise construction duration.
Performs detailed design activities and elaborates
Design Consultant
engineering deliverables
Engineering support as required to suit site conditions
Construction
and supplier-specific considerations during the
Contractor
Construction phase
Engineering Communication: Responsible for Document
PMC
Control activities on behalf of the Client

2.6 Procurement
The procurement of goods and services designed by the three design consultants
will be an important input to the design works as it has significant impacts on the
design development and the documents produced as part of the design.
The procurement will be associated with the equipment list and the material take-
off list, as well as the Bill Of Quantities (BOQ) that designers should prepare based
on other documentation and design drawings that they have to elaborate on. The
general list of documents and design drawings can be found for each discipline in
this document.
It is the responsibility of the design consultants to prepare a procurement plan for
the work included in their scope of work. Furthermore, tender documents are to be
prepared, including:
▪ Design drawings;
▪ Technical specifications;
▪ GIS information;
▪ BOQ.
Tender documents consist of multiple volumes, typically subdivided as follows:
▪ Volume I – General and Special Conditions of Contract
▪ Introduction
» Background
» Program Objectives
» Project Objectives
▪ SoW

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 27/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ General Conditions of Contract


» Project Management
▪ Special Conditions of Contract
Volume 2 – Technical Specifications
▪ Civil Technical Specifications
▪ Mechanical Technical Specifications
▪ Electrical Technical Specifications
Volume 3 – Methods of Measurements and Bills of Quantities
▪ Methods of Measurements
▪ Bills of Quantities
Volume 4 – Drawings
▪ General Layouts
▪ Plans and Profiles
▪ Tender Details
▪ Standard Details
Volume 5 – Instructions to Tenderers
▪ Submittal Format (Technical & Commercial) and Requirements
▪ Evaluation and Selection
▪ Commercial Tables Form
▪ Technical Forms
Services during and after tendering include:
▪ Provide input on tender clarifications;
▪ Attend pre-tender conference as applicable;
▪ Support the tender evaluation process
▪ Prepare a tender-evaluation report.

2.7 Permits
Designers shall be in charge of processing the necessary permits for the activities
and works to be carried out. Designers should prepare the permit applications,
consign the permit documentation, prepare the supporting documents, and follow
up on the permits until approval.
The designers must prepare a plan for obtaining the permits, which must include
estimated planning for the process, the definition of the possible entities before
which the permits must be processed, costs associated with the permits, personnel
in charge of the process of processing the permits. Likewise, the monthly reports
must contain a section on the status of each of the permits.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 28/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

As permitting has the potential to delay the tendering of the works, special attention
must be placed on the permitting process, in particular timely submission of permit
applications and frequent follow-ups.

2.8 Operational Concept


2.8.1 Operational Modes
The final design of the Primary Mains will consider all the Operation Modes
proposed by the TSE Masterplan document. In addition, it shall be updated with
the agreement of RCRC for its approval for modification or any latter update.
Designers shall model and evaluate primary mains with the hydraulic model.
The Operation Modes are depicted in the drawing TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-
00002-TSE Main Distribution System. The drawing has been developed from
Option 5 from the Master Plan (MP). The drawings show the standard operation
and alternatives in case of pipeline service interruptions within the primary network.
The following shall be achieved with the Operation Modes:
▪ Supply water from the sources (WWTP) to the strategic reservoirs (WT),
ideally in a ring structure to facilitate supply redundancy as far as reasonable;
▪ Integration of the NWC pipelines, partially constructed.
The operations periods and design flows are shown in Table 7.
Table 7: Operations Periods and Design Flows
20 hours
Operating
Transmission Pipelines GDD over 20 hours
period
(Pumping Mains) (Hence, Peak Factor
Design flow
=1.2)
Principal Pipelines
(Gravity supply from the
Design flow GDD over 24 hours
storage tank to TSE End-user
storage tanks)
Source: TSE Reuse Masterplan, RCRC 2020.

2.8.2 Redundancies for Emergency Scenarios


Each independent hydraulic system shall be evaluated under different demand
conditions, and in addition, the behaviour of the network under emergency
scenarios shall be assessed and solutions adopted for its remediation, i.e.
redundancies in the supply for zones from different pipelines to ensure that the
gardening schedule will not be compromised.
The layout of the primary and secondary network mains will be conceived,
whenever possible, to enable an alternative supply in case of a breakdown so that
the main bypass is achieved, from which other second mains are derived to the
different areas of supply.
As described in the system schematic (drawing number: TSE-G-N-00-ILF-G-EN-
PLN-00002), a total of nine (9) Operational Modes are envisaged. Operational
Mode 1 refers to the normal operating condition, and OM 2 to OM 8 consider one
of the primary mains to be out of service.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 29/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The following list describes the Operational Modes 2 to 9 within the primary mains:
▪ Operation Mode 2 – Failure Primary Main (02-PM01) from 01-WT13 to 02-
WT12
▪ Operation Mode 3 – Failure Primary Main (01-PM03) from 01-WT13 to 01-
WT09
▪ Operation Mode 4 – Failure Primary Main (01-PM04) from 01-WT09 to 02-
WT15
▪ Operation Mode 5 – Failure Primary Main (02-PM03) from 02-WT10 to 02-
WT15
▪ Operation Mode 6 – Failure Primary Main (02-PM02) from 02-WT12 to 02-
WT10
▪ Operation Mode 7 – Failure Primary Main (01-PM02) from 01-PS02 to 01-
WT03
▪ Operation Mode 8 – Failure Primary Main (01-PM05) from 01-WT03 to 01-
WT17
▪ Operation Mode 9 – Failure Primary Main (01-PM06) from 01-WT17 to 02-
WT15
▪ Operation Mode 10 – Failure Primary Main (03-PM01) from 03-WT01 to 01-
WT13
▪ Operation Mode 11 – Failure Primary Main (03-PM02) from 03-WT02 to 01-
WT09
2.8.3 Equipment Redundancies

2.8.3.1 General
In general, the undisturbed operation of the TSE network shall be possible also
with a single equipment failure. Consequently, the equipment design must include
the necessary spare capacities and stand-by units. This requirement must be
considered for all disciplines.

2.8.3.2 Main Pumps


At least one stand-by pump/motor unit must be foreseen up to five units (5 + 1). In
case six or more units are required, two stand-by pump/motor units are to be
installed (6 + 2). This applies to the full motor/pump unit, including switchgear,
speed regulation system, starter transformer, cabling, suction and discharge
piping, including valves and all auxiliaries which are needed for the operation of a
complete pump/ motor unit.
For pump unit change over, the power supply system must allow the start of the
stand-by unit before the stop of the duty unit. At regular intervals, pump change
over sequences shall be activated to provide equal operation time for all installed
pump/ motor units.

2.8.3.3 Utility Pumps


Standard Duty + 50% standby pump configurations are proposed for small pumps.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 30/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

2.8.3.4 Control Valves


All station control valves must allow full flow rate operation with one control valve
out of service. During normal operation, only the number of required duty valves
are on stream, the train for the stand-by valve shall be closed. At regular intervals,
change over sequences shall be activated to provide equal operation time of all
installed control valves.
This requirement is not valid for the pump recirculation control valves.

2.8.3.5 Surge Protection Facility


At least one standby unit shall be foreseen for surge protection equipment, e.g.
surge vessels and/or pressure relief system, if they are needed as a result of the
hydraulic analysis.

2.8.3.6 Instrumentation
For the following process instrumentation equipment, a configuration N+1 will be
foreseen:
▪ Level Transmitter in case only one tank/ vessel at a certain location shall be
foreseen. If more than one tank (section) is foreseen at a certain location, no
redundancy shall be considered as the redundancy is given with the number
of tanks;
▪ Pressure Transmitters, as far as relevant, for pressure control of the stations
(For any other pressure transmitter, no redundancy shall be foreseen);
▪ If required, for all safety-relevant instruments such as station inlet/ outlet
pressure alarms, a two-out-of-three (2oo3) configuration shall be foreseen.

2.9 Tagging
2.9.1 Tagging Logic
All equipment shall be identified by a unique ID/ Tag that allows for straightforward
reference to such equipment not just during design but also during construction
and operation. The overall tagging logic applies a location-based approach starting
at a high level of abstraction in the first few elements and becoming progressively
more detailed:
XX-XXXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXX-XXX
1 2 3 4 5
1 System Code Two number characters, the first digit will be
used for identifying the tender package once
established, the second digit is used for
identifying design packages;
2 Location Code Up to five characters;
3 Equipment/ Unit Code Three characters for the abbreviation, three
optional characters for the Number;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 31/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

4 Subsequent Equipment Code Three characters for the abbreviation, three


options for the Number;
5 Status Code Status Code are only added in the Alarm and
Event system of the SCADA system to indicate
the status of a Device if the event requires this
addition.
Tagging of devices and equipment for the disciplines Civil, Piping, Electrical shall
utilize as a minimum System(1) - Location(2) and Equipment Code(3) as indicated
above, e.g. for foundations, pipes, cables. Further details of the tagging code shall
be described by the Design Consultants.
2.9.2 System Code
The Following system codes shall be applied during design development:
▪ 01 Lot 1, TSE Distribution Network East;
▪ 02 Lot 2, TSE Distribution Network West;
▪ 03 Lot 3, TSE Distribution Network South;
▪ 08 MCC SCADA system.
As soon as the procurement strategy is finalised and tender packages are
established, the system code is expanded to incorporate the information. An
example would be system Code 11, which means the first tender package/
construction contract in Lot 1.
2.9.3 Location Code
Locations are:
▪ Pump stations
▪ Strategic Storage Tanks
▪ Neighbourhood Tanks, for neighbourhood tanks, a numbering system is
applied with 5 digits. Numbering ranges for neighbourhood tanks and related
locations, one letter can be added in front of the number, e.g. N2345 (N for
neighbourhood, V for Valve, T for Tank).
» LOT 1 x0100 to x3000
» LOT 2 x3100 to x6000
» LOT 3 x6100 to x9000
The following location codes are pre-defined and should be used as required.
Changes should be requested before use.
▪ BPSxx Booster Pump Station
▪ BVSxx Block Valve Station
▪ CITCx Commercial and Information Technology Centre
▪ NWCxx National Water RCRC
▪ NWCS1 Pipeline Manfouha to Sodous

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 32/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ NWCS2 Manfouha to PNU


▪ Parkxx City Parks project
▪ PCSxx Pressure Control Station
▪ PMIxx Park Main Irrigation
▪ PNUxx Princess Noura University
▪ PSxx Pump Station (PS-RCRC-01 – PS-RCRC-14)
▪ PUxx Pump Unit x of a PS
▪ RSBxx Riyadh Sports Boulevard
▪ STPxx Sewage Treatment Plant x
▪ TFSxx Tanker Filling Station
▪ WWTPx Wastewater Treatment Plant
2.9.4 Equipment and Subsequent Equipment - Code 3 and 4

2.9.4.1 General
The following equipment codes are pre-defined and should be used as required.
Changes should be requested before use.
▪ AC Air Compressor
▪ BPT Break Pressure Tank
▪ BRT Bus Rapid Transit
▪ CAB Cabinet
▪ CB Circuit Breaker
▪ CP Cathodic Protection
▪ CR Crane
▪ CYB Cyber Security
▪ DCS Distributed Control System
▪ DT Density transmitter
▪ EH Electrical Heater
▪ ENG Administration
▪ ESD Emergency Shutdown
▪ FGS Fire & Gas Detection System
▪ FI Filter
▪ GE Generator
▪ GW Groundwater
▪ HVAC Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
▪ ISV Isolation Valve

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 33/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ LAN Local Area Network


▪ LCR Local Control Room
▪ LDS Leak Detection System
▪ LOR Local Off Remote Switch
▪ MCC Main Control Centre
▪ PCV Pressure Control Valve
▪ PLC Programmable Logic Controller
▪ PRT Printer
▪ PRV Pressure Reducing Valve
▪ PU Pump
▪ SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System
▪ SCS Station Control System
▪ SVR Server
▪ SWT Switch
▪ UA Utility Air
▪ UCP Unit control panel
▪ UPS Uninterruptible power supply
▪ VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal
▪ VSD Variable Speed Drive
▪ WAN Wide Area Network
▪ WD Demineralised Water
▪ WF Fresh Water
▪ WP Potable Water
▪ WS Workstation
▪ WST Water Storage Tank
▪ WU Utility Water
▪ WW Waste Water

2.9.4.2 Letter Codes for Instrumentation


Table 8: Letter Codes for Instrumentation
Process condition, property
No Letter measured or initiating Function Code
variable
1 A Analysis Alarm
2 B Status Display
Controlling (PCV, FCV),
3 C
Closed (ZSC)
4 D Detector for F&G equipment Differential

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 34/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Process condition, property


No Letter measured or initiating Function Code
variable
Electrical Variables, Remark:
Element (sensor, without
5 E add a note to the symbol to
transmitter), Flow Element: FE
specify the property measured
6 F Flow rate Fail, FC Fail Close
7 G Gas (GD Gas detector)
Hand (manually, locally )
8 H High
operated
Indicating analog values (PIT,
9 I
XI)
10 J
11 K Time
12 L Level Low
13 M Motor
14 MOV Motor Operated Valve
15 N
16 P Pressure PD Differential Pressure
Quality: Add a note to the
symbol to specify the property Integrating or Summating,
17 Q
measured, Example FQ
All quality values for Water
Recording
18 R only to be used for plotters
outside SCADA
19 RO Restriction Orifice
Speed or frequency,
20 S Switch, Example PS, TS, LS
Smoke, SD (smoke detector)
Transmitting
21 T Temperature
Example: PIT, TIT, LIT, FIT
22 U Combined Values
23 V Valve, MOV, PCV, FCV
24 W Weight
For unclassified variables, add a
25 X note to the symbol to specify the
property measured
Command, remote via SCS or
26 Y
SCADA
Position
27 Z ZI, Position indication
ZSC, Position Switch Closed

2.9.5 SCADA Alarm and Events – Code 5


Further tagging rules for SCADA are described in the document TSE-G-GN-00-
ILF-G-IC-BOD-00002-R01 SCADA Concept Report.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 35/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

3 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


3.1 General
A geotechnical study should be carried out in those areas where important facilities
or facilities will be located, such as tanks, pumping stations, control buildings,
warehouses, etc.
Considering the type of structures that should be required, shallow spread
foundations are anticipated. Spread foundations will be considered where sufficient
ground bearing resistance can be mobilized within the allowable serviceability limit
state deflections.
3.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
Reports with the results of the geotechnical investigations for each facility should
be submitted by the designer.

3.2 Pad Footings


For pad footings, the geotechnical calculations will estimate and take the minimum
value of:
▪ The ultimate bearing capacity of the founding strata, divided by a Factor of
Safety of 3;
▪ The available bearing resistance for the allowable service settlement of the
supporting structure is assessed by Schmertmann’s method or by suitable
means.
The methodology for assessing the shallow foundations is based on the following
procedure:
▪ The geotechnical calculation will provide an allowable bearing resistance, not
to be exceeded by any of the structural serviceability limit state load cases.
▪ The structural calculation will determine the pad dimensions necessary to
ensure that:
» The resultant forces, for all load cases, is located within “the middle-third”
of the planar foundation area.
» The minimum bearing pressure exerted by all serviceability limit state load
cases does not exceed the allowable bearing resistance.

3.3 Raft Foundations


For raft foundations that can cover larger areas, the local geotechnical profile will
be scrutinized to quantify:
▪ Variability of ground conditions;
▪ Establish the design stiffness of the underlying strata and consider
compressibility of cohesive soils, if any;
▪ Derive moduli of sub-grade reaction across the raft area, as required.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 36/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

3.4 Bearing Resistance on Rock


The spread foundations will be designed to bear on competent rock strata with a
range of weathering levels.

3.5 Bearing Resistance and Settlement on Granular Material


Spread foundations on granular material will be analysed by Schmertmann’s
method, by PDisp analysis (soil settlement analysis) or by suitable means.

3.6 Serviceability Limit State requirements


The Serviceability Limit State requirements assumed for the design of shallow
foundations are shown in the next table.
Table 9: Serviceability Limit State for Shallow Foundations
Criteria at Foundation
Unit Pad Foundation Raft Foundation
Level
Allowable total settlement mm 25 50
The allowable differential mm 10 or 1/500 25 or 1/300
settlement with a mm (whichever is more (whichever is
foundation stringent) more stringent)
The allowable differential
10 or 1/500 (whichever
settlement between two mm Not applicable
is more stringent)
adjacent foundations

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 37/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

4 ROAD DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


4.1 General
This section presents the minimum road design requirements for the different
facilities.
4.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Construction specifications;
▪ Earthworks drawings;
▪ Road drawings,
▪ BOQ.

4.2 General Considerations


The design requirements of roads that will serve as access to the different facilities
or that are inside the facilities are presented in the following section. Roads outside
the facilities shall follow the requirements of the local authorities.
Permanent roads system, including hard standing, shall be designed as per the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
and the applicable standards specified herein on the basis of a 50-year life.
Permanent connections should be made with the existing roads network, if any.
All roads should be minimum of 7.5 m wide and constructed with asphalt
pavements. Reduction of the road width can be accepted based on the operational
requirements of the facility.
The radius of the inner road side 10 m for all roads for proper movement of traffic
is required for erection and maintenance. The minimum clearance at road crossing
under pipe bridges and cable trays should be 6.0 m.
Main and secondary roads should be designed for the heaviest construction load
of SLW60 according to AASHTO requirements.
All roads should be sloped or bi-sloped with 2.5% towards the drainage points to
the storm water system.
Walkways should be 1.5 m meters wide on both sides of all roads within the facility
and be constructed with concrete paving blocks.
Paths around the buildings and structures should be provided with a minimum
width of 1.0 m and 60 mm thick concrete paving blocks.
Parking spaces for cars should be provided to serve the maximum expected
number of cars in the facility to support the operation and maintenance activities
with a minimum width of 2.5 m and length of 5.5 m and designed based on
90°angled bay.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 38/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The landscaping should be made of 20 mm uniform-sized crushed rock gravel


such that the thickness of the gravel layer is 10 cm and the top level is flushed with
the surrounding walkways or curb stones.

4.3 Design Codes and Standards


Design of roads and paving shall conform to the following codes and standards:
▪ A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (AASHTO 2018);
▪ Design of Pavement Structures (AASHTO 1993);
▪ American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM).

4.4 Geometric Design


The geometric elements of the roads shall be designed in accordance with the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
Design should be carried out using approved software.

4.5 Design Vehicle


Design vehicles are the selected motor vehicles with the weight, dimensions, and
operating characteristics used to establish highway design controls for
accommodating vehicles of designated classes. The turning radii and other
dimensions should be large enough to meet the turning requirements of vehicles
using the intersection as per AASHTO requirements Table 2-5a Minimum Turning
Radii of Design Vehicles & Table 2-4a Design Vehicle Dimension.

4.6 Design Speed


Design speed is the maximum safe speed that can be applied for a certain roadway
class. The design speed establishes the road design elements, which mainly
includes horizontal curves and vertical curves as recommended by AASHTO
Table 3-6.

4.7 Stopping Sight Distance


Stopping sight distance is the distance required by the driver of a vehicle travelling
at a given speed to bring his vehicle to a stop after an object on the roadway
becomes visible. The design speed requirements shall follow as recommended by
AASHTO Table 3-1 and Table 3-2.

4.8 Traffic Signs


Traffic signs for all roads should be reflectorized and provided as per local rules
and regulations.
The signs and their individual elements should be capable of withstanding the
maximum wind pressure referred to in the design requirements. Layout drawings
showing the number, type and position of signs should be prepared by the
Designer. Traffic mirrors should be provided at road junctions.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 39/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Mounting posts should be of circular hollow steel section structural steel following
ASTM A123 requirements. Posts should be jointed with bolts at the base
150 millimetres above the finished level socket type. The post heads inserted in
concrete foundations should be sealed all around to prevent the ingress of water.
All foundation works should have minimum reinforcement and be protected by two
coats of coal tar.
All steelwork should be hot-dip galvanized to the requirements of ASTM A123 or
approved equivalent. The finishing colour coats should be according to the local
traffic authority requirements.

4.9 Pavement Design


The roads pavement design shall be carried out in accordance with the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) “Guide for
the Design of Pavement Structures”, 1993.
4.9.1 Design Parameters
The following design parameters should be considered while designing the
pavements:
▪ Pavement service life 30 years;
▪ Pi (initial serviceability index);
▪ Pt (terminal serviceability index) =2.5;
▪ ΔPSI = pi –pt;
▪ Expected number of load repetitions (vehicle/day);
▪ Axle load and repetitions for the design period;
▪ W18 = number of 18-kip single axle load repetitions (ESAL). (As per AASHTO
Table D.4 & D.5);
▪ Overall standard deviation (S0);
▪ SN = Structural number.
4.9.2 Determination of Pavement Layers Thicknesses
The thicknesses of the pavement layers are determined by considering the above-
mentioned design parameters and substituting them in Equation 1.2.1 as per
AASHTO or by using the design chart as per AASHTO Figure 3.1 Design Chart for
Flexible Pavements based on using mean values for each input. The minimum
recommended structural number required above each layer should be as listed
below:
▪ Subgrade: SN3;
▪ Subbase: SN2;
▪ Base: SN1.
Where:
SN = Structural number = a1*D1+ a2*D2 * m2 + a3*D3* m3

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 40/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

D1 = actual thicknesses (in inch) of the asphalt layer.


D2 = actual thicknesses (in inch) of the base layer.
D3 = actual thicknesses (in inch) of sub-base layer.
ZR = standard normal deviate for given reliability. The relationship between R and
ZR is given in Table (4.1 as per AASHTO).

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 41/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5 CIVIL AND HYRAULIC DESIGN


REQUIREMENTS
5.1 General
The present section presents the required elements for the design of the pipelines,
including valves, fittings and others, the pumping stations and the storage tanks.
5.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Facilities layout;
▪ Calculation reports;
▪ Piping orthographic drawings;
▪ Interface detail drawings;
▪ Pipeline modelling report;
▪ Typical and special chambers/manhole drawings;
▪ Drainage drawings;
▪ Constructability report (it should include at minimum identification of delivery
routes; site access for construction equipment; scope for modularisation and
offsite assembly; strategy for minimising double handling of equipment and
different bulk materials; strategy for minimising clashes onsite.);
▪ Tank maintenance concept report (leak detection and leak repair, major
overhaul, cleaning of large tanks, removal of sediment etc. shall be described);
▪ Material Take-Off;
▪ Bill of Quantity.

5.2 Pipe Layout and Routing


5.2.1 General Considerations
The layout of the TSE network pipes should be as direct as possible between
facilities to minimize the overall network length. Generally, pipelines must be
installed on public land that is legally usable or, in exceptional cases and after
consultation with RCRC, on private lands that are accessible permanently and with
the constitution of the appropriate easement.
In urban areas, a layout proposal must be provided based on the design and
calculation suitable for the type of road. The pipelines will run through roads or
public spaces that cannot be built on afterwards.
Regarding the minimum depths at which pipes have to be installed, in general, it is
established that the upper crown of the pipes must be at a minimum depth ≥ 0.80 m
if they run through the pavement and ≥ 1.00 m if they run through the road, making
it necessary to adopt the necessary protection measures when, for reasons
justified, the minimum cover indicated cannot be respected.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 42/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.2.2 Right of Way Requirements


The pipeline routes should be defined based on the following general regulations:
▪ Usage of public ground and pipeline corridors along roads as far as possible
▪ Minimization of length and number of the road- or other crossings
▪ Minimization of environmental impact
The ROW maps will have to be prepared in such a way that all involved lots are
included according to the land register office. Furthermore, the length of the
pipeline for each lot concerned and the corresponding area for permanent ROW
and temporary ROW will have to be identified.
With the ROW drawings, the respective landowner and his address can be
ascertained at the land register.
Once the landowners have been identified by means of the land register, NWC can
initiate the actual right-of-way procedure (negotiations, compensation payments,
etc.).
Before commencement of construction, all landowners must have signed the
servitude contracts. Commencement of construction should not take place without
successful and completed right-of-way negotiations.
5.2.3 Other Utility Crossings
When crossing other lineal utilities (roads, railways, wadis, etc.), the general
guidelines to be followed will depend on the technical, economic or functional
conditions in each case (terrain profile, pipe diameter, installation length, etc.), so
each situation must be properly studied. In this sense, in the design project that
must be submitted to RCRC for approval, the adopted installation method must be
justified, taking into account the relevant conditions and prescriptions. The general
conditions to be fulfilled will be the following:
▪ As and when required, the pipes must be housed inside a sheath tube of
sufficient diameter to allow its subsequent disassembly and repair in case of
breakdown or modification. This section will have manholes at least at the
beginning and at the end;
▪ In cases where it is necessary to make the crossing without interfering with
the operation of the existing infrastructure, the installation of the pipeline shall
be carried out in accordance with the existing rules and standards.
There must be a sufficient separation with the possible services that could be
affected to facilitate operations, maintenance, etc. of both services.
In general, it must be ensured that the separation between the external limit of the
TSE network and those of the other services is ≥ 0.40 m in longitudinal horizontal
projection and that under no circumstances the existing free space surrounding the
pipe is less than 0.20 m.
The crossing with cables or other conduits must be carried out in such a way that
the layout of the network is as perpendicular as possible, trying to maintain a
separation between network extents ≥ 0.20 m, measured in the vertical direction.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 43/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The supply networks must be installed at a sufficient distance from the buildings to
reduce, as far as possible, the damage that could occur as a result of their
breakage.
In general, and whatever the depth at which it is measured, the minimum distances
to external wall of buildings, foundations or other similar underground facilities, will
be as follows:
▪ For pipes with DN <300 mm: Minimum distance = 0.80 m
▪ For pipes with DN ≥ 300 mm: Minimum distance = 0.35 m + 1.5 x DN
When it is not possible to choose the layout of the routing, because they run on
consolidated urban roads, with buildings and infrastructure of other pre-existing
services, the indicated separations will be adopted whenever possible, and when
not, they will be reduced leaving the maximum separation that is feasible and
adopting sufficient protections that guarantee the non-involvement between
elements and networks, which must be justified prior to its final design and
execution.
If, for justified reasons, the recommended distances cannot be maintained, prior to
its execution, the compliance with the precautionary measures that are needed
and proposed, properly calculated and justified, must be requested. In any case,
appropriate measures must be taken to avoid any direct contact with or adverse
impacts on existing or known proposed or already permitted structures.
Pipelines must not be laid closer than 60 m from the centre line of the track when
parallel to the Metro. In addition, underground stations should be avoided due to
the number of services already existing in the area and limited depth of 2 m
available above the station to the ground level.

5.3 Pipeline Sizing


5.3.1 TSE Demand
Based on TSE Masterplan the water demand shall match the maximum Daily
Demand (DD), an d is expressed as follow:
Gross Daily Demand (GDD)= (1 + LF) DDx DD
5.3.2 Peaks Flows
Secondary Mains shall be sized and modelled under Peak Flow conditions by
considering all the demand loads are activated for each respective area
considering the worst case seasonal scenario (summer demand).
5.3.3 Minimum Pipe Diameter
The minimum nominal diameter for primary mains will be 300 mm and for
secondary mains 150 mm. Smaller diameters are suitable for selection as long as
it is properly justified and approved by RCRC.
5.3.4 Minimum and Maximum Pressure
The conditions to be met by selected elements with respect to the design
parameters, are considered under the provisions of the BS EN 805 standard.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 44/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ PFA ≥ DP;
▪ MAWP≥ MDP;
▪ PEA ≥ TP.
If required, gate valves of larger diameters and higher nominal pressures than
those indicated may be used, being able to reach nominal pressures of 40 bar
(PN 40).
The residual pressure requirements are shown in Table 10.
Table 10: Residual Pressure
15 m minimum at end of TSE Principal Pipelines
Valves installed on all connections directly off the
Residual Pressure
transmission pipelines (Pumping Station to Reservoir)
(above GL)
Maximum setting 90 m downstream pressure
Maximum static pressure of 90 m in distribution network
Source: TSE Reuse Masterplan, RCRC 2020
5.3.5 Velocities
The determination of the flow velocity of the TSE is essential in the design of the
supply network, since for a given flow rate the choice of the pipe diameter depends
on it. For functional reasons, the TSE flow velocity must be limited between a
maximum and a minimum value.
If the velocity is excessively high, high pressure drops occur and overpressure
derived from possible water hammer can be significant and cause pipe bursts. On
the other hand, relatively high velocities avoid the formation of deposits of
suspended solids which can lead to blockages and can cause carbonate
incrustations on the walls, thus reducing the useful cross-section of the pipe.
On the contrary, when the speed is excessively low, in addition to the underuse of
the pipe that this supposes and to the sensible reduction of the residual chlorine in
the water, facilitates the formation of deposits of suspended matter that can cause
obstructions and carbonate incrustations on the walls, thereby reducing the useful
section of passage.
It is recommended that pipes shall be designed to have a velocity not exceed the
limits shown in Table 11.
Table 11: Pipe Velocities
Velocity Pipe Type
(m/s)
0.6 TSE Transmission pipelines
Minimum
0.2 TSE Principal pipelines
1.0 Branch line connections
1.5 Principal pipelines
Maximum
2.0 Transmission pipelines
5.0 Scour flow in Pipelines
Source: TSE Reuse Masterplan. RCRC. 2020.

These are maximum values in order to limit head loss gradient and transient
pressures, and to increase lining durability. However, technically and economically
optimized systems can be designed with lower velocities.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 45/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

ILF recommends that twin pipelines shall be constructed in exceptional cases in


which a single pipeline is not recommended for economic reasons. In those cases,
adequate equipment shall be installed to allow to one line be out of service while
the other is operational.
5.3.6 Pipe Friction Factors
The friction factors and losses that must be considered in the project are shown in
the following table.
Table 12: Pipe Roughness, Friction Factors and Losses
Pipe Friction Factors Pipelines;
(Absolute Roughness, ks) (Incl. fittings losses)
Transmission pipelines /
Pumping Lines
FCCP 0.30 mm
GRP 0.20 mm
Ductile Iron >
0.20 mm
500
Steel
(cement mortar 0.30 mm
lined)
Principal Lines
Ductile Iron 0.50 mm
HDPE < 500 0.50 mm

Only the use of Colebrook-


White or Darcy-Weisbach
formulae (with friction factor,
, determined using Moody
diagram or equivalent
formula); are acceptable for
design
Distribution pipelines
HDPE < 500 1.00 mm

Pipe diameter
Friction Head Loss Gradient Gradient
(mm)
600 – 1,500 Not to exceed 10 m/km
> 1,500 Not to exceed 5 m/km

Secondary Losses / Friction


10 %
Losses Ratio
Source: TSE Reuse Masterplan. RCRC. 2020.

5.3.7 Water Losses/ Leakages


According TSE Masterplan the system will sized considering a Design Loss Factor
of 10% of water losses over the Daily Demand along transmission and distribution
lines.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 46/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.3.8 Head Losses Calculation


The Darcy-Weisbach equation for calculating head losses due to friction in
pressurized flow is to be adopted. It is noted that while most models can use either
the Hazen-Williams or the Darcy-Weisbach equation to compute head losses, the
Hazen-Williams equation is only applicable to a limited range of Reynolds numbers
(Re). Thus, it is recommended to use the Darcy-Weisbach equation, which
includes all flow regimes. Darcy-Weisbach equation is:

Where:
▪ hf = Friction head loss (m);
▪ f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor;
▪ L = Length of pipe (m);
▪ D = Pipe diameter (m);
▪ V = Flow velocity (m/s);
▪ g = Acceleration due to gravity (m/s2).
Darcy-Weisbach Friction Factor can be calculated using the empirical Colebrook-
White equation. This equation applies in turbulent flow conditions, i.e. Re > 4,000,
which is the case in water and wastewater applications.

Where:
▪ f = Darcy-Weisbach Friction Factor;
▪ ɛ = Pipe roughness (m);
▪ D = Pipe diameter (m);
▪ Re = Reynolds Number.
Reynolds number is calculated as:

Where:
▪ Re = Reynolds Number;
▪ V = Flow velocity (m/s);
▪ D = Pipe diameter (m);
▪ 𝜐 = Kinematic viscosity of the fluid (m2/s) which will change with temperature,
e.g. water at 25°C has a kinematic viscosity of 8.9e-7 m2/s.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 47/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.3.9 Local Head Losses


It shall be also considered the head losses due to valves and special elements
(elbows, tees, diameter change, etc.). The coefficient for calculation shall be
according material specification from manufacturers.

Where:
▪ hL = Minor head loss (m);
▪ k = Minor loss coefficient for each type of element and material;
▪ V = Flow velocity (m/s);
▪ g = Gravity acceleration (m/s2).
In the following table the typical k values are shown. These values must be verified
against specific manufactures’ recommendations.
Table 13: Typical k Values
Description k
Entrance Bellmouth 0.005
Rounded 0.25
Sharp-Edged 0.5
Projecting 0.8
Exists 1.0
90°Bend 0.25
45°Bend 0.18
Tee, line flow 0.30
Tee, branch flow 0.75
Cross, line flow 0.50
Cross, branch flow 0.75
Wye, 45° 0.50
Ball 0.04
Check Valves Ball 0.9 - 1.7
Rubber Flapper (v < ft/s) 2.0
Rubber Flapper (v > ft/s) 1.1
Swing 0.6 - 2.2
Gate Double Disc 0.1 - 0.2
Resilient Disc 0.3
Knife Gate Metal Seat 0.2
Resilient Seat 0.3
Eccentric Plug Rectangular (80%) opening 1.0
Full bore opening 0.5

5.4 Hydraulic Design


The following aspects will be checked as part of hydraulic design vetting to ensure
that the system is designed properly in regard to its hydraulic functions and safety:
▪ Checking of the hydraulic design criteria, data and assumptions;
▪ Check of Hydraulic load cases;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 48/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Checking the results: pressure classes of pipes and equipment, surge


protection systems, pumps data.
The Hydraulic analysis of the TSE Network must be carried out using trusted and
approved computer software. The preferred software for modelling the TSE
network will be Bentley WaterGEMS.
The required system design parameters are given below. The hydraulic model
output / results should include the following as minimum:
▪ Hydraulic calculation sheets in excel format including at least but not limited
to:
» Pipes: pipe ID, lengths, diameter, starting and ending nodes, starting and
ending coordinates, coordinates, flow, velocity, friction coefficient, head-
loss gradient;
» Nodes: Node ID, type, elevation, demand, hydraulic grade, pressures.
▪ Hydraulic profiles;
▪ Hydraulic model database and GIS database.
5.4.1 Elements of the Hydraulic Modelling Task
The design of the TSE network shall be based on the hydraulic modelling of the
systems. The modelling must be based on hydraulic, operational and water quality
task like:
▪ Steady-state and extended period simulations;
▪ Water age analysis;
▪ Criticality analysis;
▪ Rule based or logical controls;
▪ System head curves;
▪ Pressure-dependent demands;
▪ Scenario modelling-based unidirectional flushing;
▪ Valve modelling;
▪ Air release valve element;
▪ Top fill tank element;
▪ Combination pump curves.
The facilities of the TSE network should be schematized for the modelling as an
approximation of the items in the field. The facilities to be schematized includes
pipes, nodes, flow control valves, pressure reducing valves and isolation valves,
storage tanks and reservoirs.
Nodes can represent the following components of the network:
▪ Pumps;
▪ Valves:
» PRV (Pressure Reducing Valve);

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 49/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

» PCV (Pressure Control Valve);


» ISV (Isolation Valve).
▪ Junction Nodes:
» Points of TSE consumption (demand nodes);
» Points of TSE input (source nodes).
▪ Fixed Nodes:
» Location of tanks or reservoir (storage nodes).
The design of the networks should take into account the pressure zones that will
be established according to the pressure requirements and the city topography.
The spatial allocation of TSE demands also must be consider for the TSE
distribution model.
The designer must present a report of the modelling results with all information
used and assumptions taken. Also all the modelling files for al operation modes
shall be supplied to RCRC.
5.4.2 Calculation Scenarios
I. Zero Demand Scenario, steady state scenario; it shall be verified that the
operating pressure (OP), equivalent to the static pressure in gravity networks
and the pumping pressure in gravity networks, shall not exceed 0.9 MPa at
any point in the network.
II. Design Horizon Scenario with GDD; The Operating Pressure (OP) at any
point in the network shall not be less than 0.40 MPa.
III. Peak Flow (summer demand); The following considerations shall be
taken into account:
▪ In Primary Mains, the peak consumption shall coincide with the design
pumping flow of the WWTP;
▪ In Secondary Mains, in this type of distribution network for greening areas,
initially the maximum circulating flow would be the one corresponding to the
maximum demand, i.e. the one corresponding to all fully open inlets of the
Neighbourhood Tanks at the same time. This situation is rarely going to occur,
as demand from different green areas are likely be different in pattern along
time. Therefore the sizing of the secondary mains with these flows would
excessively oversize the network. Upon acceptance of RCRC, it shall be
studied either optimum schedule Neighbourhood Tank supply or
probabilistically methods for each secondary main the optimum diameter.
IV. Emergency situation; In the case of unavailability of any primary mains due
to bursting event, it shall be evaluated the capacity of zones interconnection
and the auxiliary sufficiency of supply.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 50/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.4.3 Surge/ Water Hammer Analysis


The potential causes of water hammer within the TSE distribution network shall be
evaluated and selected for performing the detail modelling analysis. In general, the
main situations that can result in a water hammer are:
▪ Pump shutdown due to a unexpected cut off the power supply or a power
failure;
▪ Sudden activation of the check-valve of wells outlet due to any damage or
accidental circumstance;
▪ Sudden change in hydraulic regime as result of starting or stopping up one or
more pumps whilst other pumps are in operation;
▪ Closing or opening of shut-off valves in the piping system;
▪ Closing or opening of big hydrants or consumers;
▪ Excitation of resonant vibrations by pumps with an unstable H/Q curve.
As result of the water hammer analysis, the designer shall specify the type of surge
control finally selected considering technical and economical balance, and the
technical specifications needed for its implementation.

5.5 Pipelines

5.5.1 Material Selection


In any case, the mains shall be first sized taking into account the flow, speed,
pressure and existing diameters so checking that with the new mains to be
planned, all TSE demands are met. The selection of the materials for the primary
and secondary pipes will be based on the results of the design calculations.
The recommended materials are:
▪ Ductile Iron (DI);
▪ Concrete Lined Steel Pipe (CS);
For each type of material, the pipe shall be of the commercial diameter and
indicated pressure class respectively. The minimum thickness for each pipe size
shall be also as indicated by its class. Table 14 represents the recommended
material selection for RCRC TSE Distribution network.
Table 14: Recommended Material Selection for RCRC TSE Distribution Network
Material
Diameter Carbon Steel Pipes with Ductile Iron with Cement
(mm) Cement Mortar Mortar
(CS) (DI)
0 - 600 X
600 - 1,200 X X
> 1,200 X X
Carbon steel pipes should follow standards API 5L “Pipe Line”, steel grade X42.(all
in their latest published version):
▪ API 5L for pipeline and fitting material, steel grade X42 recommended;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 51/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ ASME B31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquids and Slurries;


▪ ASME B16 (in particular B16.5, B16.9, B16.49) for pipe fittings.
In general the following recommendations shall be taken:
▪ CS pipes are recommended for larger diameter and high pressure regimes.
The pipes shall have an internal cement mortar lining and an external coating;
▪ DI pipes are recommended for smaller diameter pipes. The pipes shall have
an internal cement mortar lining and an external coating;
For diameters below 300 mm, non-metallic pipes may be proposed if the design
conditions are suitable and if adequately justified by the design consultant.
5.5.2 Mechanical Design of TSE Network

5.5.2.1 Pipe Joints and Fittings


Pipe joints and fittings should be used as necessary in the pipeline design. The
different pipe joints and fittings should comply with ASME, ASTM and/or AWWA
requirements, according to the working conditions where it will be use and the
material selection. The type of joints that are allow to be use are flanged joints,
welded joint, bolted sleeve type couplings and expansion joints. Other elements of
pipe joint and fittings can be submitted from the designer for the approval of the
client.

5.5.2.2 Dismantling Joints


Dismantling joints used for the installation and removal of pipe sections and valves
shall comply with AWWA, BS ISO and/or BS EN standards.

5.5.2.3 Tee, Double Flanged Pipe and Reducers


Tee, double flanged pipe and reducers shall comply with standards NF EN 545,
Class K9; BS ISO 2531 and shall not affect water quality. PFA 16 bars (working
pressure 16 bars) and epoxy external coating anti-corrosion with minimum 250
microns in compliance with BS EN 14901 standards.
The double welded flanged anchoring pipe with puddle flange type can be
requested as per the specific needs of the installation works.

5.5.2.4 Restraint of Thrust


Two commonly types of anchoring systems are to be considered:
▪ Anchoring blocks;
▪ Self-locking or bolted joints.
These systems are only required if the pipe material/ bedding system cannot
otherwise absorb the forces resuting from fluid motion or surge conditions. In case
of welded carbon steel pipes such systems may not be required.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 52/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.5.3 External Corrosion Protection


The type of protective coating system required for any particular material will
depend on the environment to which it is to be exposed. Accordingly, there are four
surface classes of environmental exposure as follows:
▪ Non-immersed aggressive conditions to include;
» Wet wells (sewage and sludge) above maximum sump levels;
» Enclosed sewage treatment process units and sludge holding tanks
above maximum working levels;
» Open sewage treatment process units and sludge holding tanks above
working levels but susceptible to splashing, windblown spray, etc.;
» Chemical storage, batching and dosing equipment and rooms not in direct
contact with the chemical.
▪ Immersed (non-potable) conditions to include;
» Wet wells, reservoirs, sludge tanks, sewage treatment process units
below operating levels;
» Chemical storage batching and dosing (additional special treatment may
be necessary as recommended by the Supplier).
▪ Non-immersed non-aggressive conditions;
» Areas that do not come into contact with process fluids, or their related
atmospheres, i.e. normal atmospheric conditions.
Table 15 to Table 18 detail the minimum acceptable coating systems to be applied
generally to facilities in each environment.
Plant fastenings and fixings that are to remain unpainted shall be stainless steel
Grade 316L, galvanized or sherardized to BS EN 17668: 2016, but in accordance
with its location.
Electro-galvanizing, nickel cadmium or any other plating processes will not be
acceptable.
Where zinc spray is specified it shall be to BS EN ISO 2063-1 or equivalent.
Structural corrosion resistant aluminium alloy shall only be used in none
aggressive locations and shall not be painted unless specifically called for by the
Client except bolt holes and faces which shall be degreased and given one coat of
zinc epoxy.
Machined sliding and rotating surfaces, shall not be painted, but shall be given one
coat of a mixture of white lead and tallow or other similar approved material before
dispatch from Works/Factory.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 53/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 15: Non-Immersed, Aggressive Conditions


Site
Total
Substrate Surface Shop Shop Shop Shop Applied
DFT
Final Coat
General
High Build High Build
Degrease and Purpose
Steel Polyamide Polyamide
Abrade Epoxy N/A 250 325
Galvanized Epoxy Epoxy
Sweep blast Primer
150 µm 75 µm
100 µm
MIO High Build High Build
As per paint
Steel HZS Pigmented Polyamide Polyamide
manufacturer N/A 200 350
(100 µm) two pack Epoxy Epoxy
data sheet
50 µm 150 µm 150 µm
General
Aluminium High Build High Build
Purpose
& other Degrease & Polyamide Polyamide 200
Epoxy N/A 125
non-ferrous Abrade Epoxy Epoxy 200
Primer
metal 75 µm 75 µm
50 µm
Zinc Rich MIO High Build High Build
Ductile & Epoxy Pigmented Polyamide Polyamide
Blast SA2½ 325 475
Cast Iron Primer two pack Epoxy Epoxy
100 µm 75 µm 150 µm 150 µm
Zinc Rich MIO High Build High Build
Epoxy Pigmented Polyamide Polyamide
Mild Steel Blast SA2½ 325 475
Primer two pack Epoxy Epoxy
100 µm 75 µm 150 µm 150 µm
Note: Where extra abrasion resistance is called for, and for temperatures in excess of 60°C, the priming
coat shall be amine cured phenolic epoxy of 100 µm thickness. For temperatures above 60°C, the
finishing coat shall be 100 µm first finishing coat applied at works and 100 µm site applied final coat.
All steel, ductile and cast iron station/Plant pipework shall be externally painted to this Specification
DFT - Dry Film Thickness
HZS - Hot Zinc Spray
MIO - Micaceous Iron Oxide
HAS - Hot aluminium spray

Table 16: Immersed (Non-Potable) Conditions


Shop
Shop Shop Site
Applied
Substrate Surface Applied Applied Applied Total DFT
Second
First Coat Third Coat Final Coat
Coat
General
High Build High Build
Degrease Purpose
Steel Polyamide Polyamide
and Abrade Epoxy N/A 375
Galvanized Epoxy Epoxy
Sweep blast Primer
150 µm 150 µm
75 µm
MIO High Build High Build
As per paint
Steel HZS Pigmented Polyamide Polyamide
Manufacturer N/A 250
(100 µm) two pack Epoxy Epoxy
data sheet
50 µm 100 µm 100 µm
Zinc Rich High Build
Pigmented
Ductile & Epoxy Polyamide
Blast SA2½ two pack N/A 450
Cast Iron Primer Epoxy
150 µm
150 µm 150 µm
Zinc Rich High Build
Pigmented
Mild Steel & Epoxy Polyamide
Blast SA2½ two pack N/A 450
Non Ferrous Primer Epoxy
150 µm
150 µm 150 µm
Note: All steel, ductile and cast iron station/Plant pipework shall be externally painted to this Specification
DFT - Dry Film Thickness
HZS - Hot Zinc Spray
MIO - Micaceous Iron Oxide
HAS - Hot Aluminum Spray

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 54/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 17: Non-Immersed Non-Aggressive Conditions


Shop
Shop Site
Applied
Substrate Surface Applied Applied Total DFT
Second
First Coat Final Coat
Coat
Steel Degrease and
Galvanized Abrade Sweep None None None None
(1) blast
General High build
Ductile &
Purpose Recoated two pack
Cast Iron
Blast SA2½ Epoxy Epoxy Urethane 165
Mild Steel
Primer 75 µm gloss
(2)
50 µm 40 µm
Table 18: Immersed in Potable water
Shop
Shop
Applied Site Applied Total
Substrate Surface Applied
Second Final Coat DFT
First Coat
Coat
General
High Build
Degrease and Purpose High Build
Steel Polyamide
Abrade Sweep Epoxy Polyamide 325
Galvanized Epoxy
blast Primer Epoxy 150 µm
150 µm
25 µm
MIO High Build
As per paint High Build
Steel HZS Pigmented Polyamide
Manufacturer Polyamide 250
(100µm) two pack Epoxy
data sheet Epoxy 100 µm
50 µm 100 µm
Polyamide High Build
High Build
Ductile & Epoxy Polyamide
Blast SA2½ Polyamide 375
Cast Iron Primer Epoxy
Epoxy 150 µm
75 µm 150 µm
Polyamide High Build
Mild Steel & High Build
Epoxy Polyamide
Non Blast SA2½ Polyamide 375
Primer Epoxy
Ferrous Epoxy 150 µm
75 µm 150 µm

5.5.3.1 Aboveground Steel Pipe Coating


For Main and Secondary Pipelines concrete coating is considered. For other
pipelines dielectric lining for steel pipe and associated fittings could be considered.
Acceptable dielectric linings include too-percent solids epoxy or too-percent solids
aromatic polyurethane, designed specifically for pipe conveying raw sewage.
Provide products with a minimum, verifiable service of five (5) years in raw sewage
and ten (10) similar projects where the product has been used in large diameter
steel pipe conveying saline water or raw sewage. Provide Manufacturer’s
recommended primer, if required.

5.5.3.2 Buried Metal Pipe


For Main and Secondary Pipelines that are buried concrete lining is considered.
For other steel pipes and fittings that are buried 100% polyurethane, extruded
polyethylene, or other bonded dielectric coating designed specifically for corrosion
protection could be considered. Protective coatings for buried steel pipe must have
a successful application and verifiable service record of at least ten (10) years in
highly saline environments. Prepare surfaces and apply coatings in accordance

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 55/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

with the Manufacturer's written directions. Provide coating with a minimum


thickness of 2,000 μm.
To protect against the potential risk of corrosion DI pipes shall be protected
internally with cement mortar lining, fusion bonded epoxy powder or ceramic epoxy
or polyurethane are adequate alternatives. The minimum requirement for external
protection of DI pipes is metallic zinc (200 g/m2) + bitumen finishing coat. DI pipes
with an external polyurethane coating are considered preferable in cases of highly
corrosive or contaminated soils.
During the development of the Detail Engineering protection measures should be
proposed.
5.5.4 Pipeline Interior Lining
For the interior lining of the pipelines AWWA standards should be considered
(C205 “Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe – 4 In.
and Larger - Shop Applied”, C210 “Liquid-Epoxy Coating System for the Interior
and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines”, C213 “Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for
the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines” or C222 “Polyurethane Coatings
for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings”. The designer should
proposed to the client the best option for lining the interior of the pipeline depending
of each case (Main Pipelines, Secondary Pipelines, other types of pipelines).
5.5.5 Construction Methods

5.5.5.1 Buried Pipelines


Pipelines are often buried in the ground, for protection against e.g. severe climate,
accidents and sabotage or for crossing an obstacle like a road, other pipelines, etc.
Drawings shall show the other buried existing or proposed utilities within the
pipeline area, including storm and sanitary sewers, drywells, buried telephone,
natural gas, power, and cable TV lines that are concurrent with water main
construction.
Buried pipe thrust restraint may be provided by joints individually restrained with
proprietary restrained joints or with thrust-rated products designed to restrain
standard pipe joints. Pipe thrust load may also be carried by concrete thrust blocks
where adequate soil-bearing pressure is available.
The top of the pipelines shall be at a sufficient depth below ground level to protect
the pipeline. The following requirements shall be considered:
▪ 0.3 m of minimum cover where the sewer is located in rock;
▪ 1.0 m of cover in other material, unless the pipe is encased in concrete or in a
steel casing. A minimum cover depth of 1.0 meter or more is recommended
good practice for traffic loading using well compacted granular soils as backfill;
▪ More than 1.0 m cover is required in major rivers, creeks or streams;
▪ Minimum 2.0 m cover is required in shifting creeks or stream channels.
Other minimum coverages can be used by presenting the studies that support the
proposal to be evaluated.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 56/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

In situations where pipes are to be buried under a roadway, or continuing traffic


loading is anticipated, the backfill material should be compacted to grade level.
Minimum cover restrictions may be reduced with special installations such as
concrete encasement, concrete cover slabs, castings, etc.
Buried pipe must be designed to resist earth pressure in trench or fill condition.
The trench width to install the pipeline is a function of the pipe diameter and the
native soil, and should consider to evaluate interference with other installations.
Unless detailed otherwise, pipelines of ductile iron and fittings for buried application
shall have flexible joints. Also the bolts and nuts shall be properly protected.
Buried steel pipelines shall be designed to resist earth pressure in trench or fill
condition. Adequate coating / cathodic protection shall be provided for buried pipes
based on the condition of the soil. Wrap the stainless steel pipe in a protective
material, such as a petrolatum tape, prior to burial in accordance with AWWA
C209, Standard for Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special
Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.

5.5.5.2 Aerial Pipelines


Aerial installations may be required to cross over an obstacle such as a roadway,
a streambed or a depression in the terrain.
If pipe is to be supported from a bridge, a structural analysis shall be performed to
determine the structural requirements of the bridge.
Pipe shall be supported with a pipe hanger that allows longitudinal movement.
Support shall be an adjustable steel yoke pipe roll or approved equal. In addition,
a horizontal support from pipe hanger to the bridge shall be provided so that the
pipe assembly will not move horizontally due to wind loads, etc. The spacing of the
pipe hangers shall depend upon the maximum recommended load of hanger.
Expansion jointing shall be provided between above ground and below ground
pipelines. When buried pipelines change to aerial pipelines, special construction
techniques shall be used to minimize heaving.
In the case that the supports are located near a road, protection should be
considered in case of impact of a vehicle to the structure.
The structural design of the support elements should consider the maximum
permissible deflection of the pipeline according to the spacing between supports.
Proper joint technology, such as flanged, restrained, or mechanical; adequate
supports to prevent excessive deflection and flexion; or a combination shall be
provided for aerial pipe crossings. Pipe supports shall be designed to withstand
the hydrodynamic effects of the stream flow pressure.
Expansion jointing shall be provided between above ground and below ground
sewers. When buried sewers change to aerial sewers, special construction
techniques shall be used to minimize heaving.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 57/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.5.5.3 Micro Tunnelling


Tunnel construction for pipelines by one-pass methods with or without man entry.
The construction methods involve jacking pipe following a hand-shield excavation
or a tunnel boring machine (TBM) or micro-tunnel boring machine (MTBM), with
the pipe serving as both the tunnel liner during construction and the pipeline after
completion of construction.
The construction methods can be defined as:
▪ Jacked Pipe: A method for installing sewer pipe that serves as initial
construction lining and tunnel support, installed for stability and safety during
construction, and as the sewer pipe. The pipe is shoved forward, or jacked, as
the tunnel is advanced.
▪ Microtunneling: A method of installing pipe by jacking the pipe behind a
microtunnel boring machine which is connected to and shoved forward by the
pipe being installed, generally precluding man-entry.
▪ Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM): Mechanized excavating equipment that is a
steerable, guided and articulated, connected to and shoved forward by the
pipe being installed, with man entry.
▪ Microtunnel Boring Machine (MTBM): Mechanized excavating equipment
that is remotely-controlled, steerable, guided and articulated, connected to and
shoved forward by the pipe being installed, usually precluding man entry.
Microtunneling has been considered to be the preferred construction method for
situations that can be found in Riyadh. Is currently the most accurate pipeline
installation method. Line and grade tolerances of one inch are the micro tunneling
industry standard. This can be extremely important when trying to install a new
pipeline in an area where a large number of under-ground utility lines already
exists. It can be used to install pipes from eight inches (200 mm) to twelve feet
(3,600 mm) in diameter.
The technique can be used to negotiate obstacles such as motorways, railways,
rivers, canals, buildings and airfields in the path of pipe laying projects; to minimize
the surface disruption frequently associated with open cut pipe laying methods in
urban areas; or simply to provide a permanent underground tunnel construction.
When designing the Microtunnel for the pipelines, a thorough site investigation,
both factual and interpretative, and report is required in order to determine the
characteristics of the soils likely to be encountered, together with details of the
water table in the vicinity. The site investigation should follow the guidance given
in:
▪ Eurocode 7, “Geotechnical Design - Part 1: General Rules”, 2010;
▪ Eurocode 7: “Geotechnical Design - Part 2: Ground Investigation and Testing”,
2010;
▪ “UK Specification for Ground Investigation” (ICE Site Investigation Steering
Group), 2011;
▪ “Tunnel Lining Design Guide”, British Tunnelling Society (BTS), 2004;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 58/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ All exploratory hole work, associated sampling, in situ testing and logging shall
be carried out in accordance with techniques outlined in:
» “Code of Practice for Ground Investigations” BS 5930:2015+A1, 2020;
» “Geotechnical Investigation and Testing - Identification, Description and
Classification of Rock - Part 1: Identification and Description” BS EN ISO
14689-1, 2018;
» “Geotechnical Investigation and Testing - Identification and Classification
of Soil - Part 1: Identification And Description” BS EN ISO 14688-1, 2018;
» “Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes - Part 1: General
Requirements and Sample Preparation” BS 1377-1, 2016;
» “Geotechnical Investigation and Testing - Field Testing - Part 3: Standard
Penetration Test” BS EN ISO 22476-3: 2005.
▪ “Closed-Face Tunnelling Machines and Ground Stability: A Guideline for Best
Practice”, British Tunnelling Society and Institution of Civil Engineers (Thomas
Telford Publishing), 2005;
A desktop study should be carried out, assessing the available literature, maps,
aerial photographs, utility plans and existing site investigations. The desk study is
essential to help understand the broader geological and geotechnical issues, and
should be used to determine the scope of any intrusive investigations.
The design must include:
▪ Hydraulic requirements (of pipeline);
▪ Structural integrity;
▪ Drive lengths and alignment;
▪ Manhole requirements;
▪ Depth;
▪ Gradient (of pipeline);
▪ Ground conditions;
▪ Details of existing services and underground structures (clearances);
▪ Location of manholes and working areas;
▪ Lengths required (of the pipeline and the microtunneling);
▪ Diameters of pipeline;
▪ Diameter of casing if required;
▪ Structural and construction additional requirements (supporting walls, access
chambers, etc.);
▪ Economic.
5.5.6 Other Considerations
All pipeline arrangements should consider the shortest and most economical route.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 59/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The piping arrangements should consider the removal facilities in the vicinity of the
equipment for inspection, service and / or maintenance activities.
The facilities for the location of the lifting equipment, for valves, pipes
arrangements, etc., in the construction and / or maintenance phase, should be
considered.
5.5.7 Chambers and Manholes
The chambers and manholes will allow access to buried pipes (in particular
places), valves or other equipment / elements that require inspection during the
system operation.
Chambers and Manholes shall be specifically designed with an emphasis on safety
during installation, operation and maintenance.
The designer shall provide the proposed construction method with the design
documentation.
A secure safety grille shall be provided beneath the manhole cover for deep
chambers and manholes.
Manholes shall be designed to be constructed as segmental, panel or one-unit
structures, made of precast or cast in-situ reinforced concrete. The general shape
of manholes may be circular, rectangular, or any other shape that satisfies all
design requirements of this section. Manholes shall be designed so that structural
integrity between its components is maintained during installation and normal
service life. The effect of pipe entries on the structural integrity of the manhole
risers shall be considered during design.
All chambers and manholes shall be designed to support all existing and any
predicted future dead loads, included vehicular traffic loads.
Manholes and chambers shall also be designed to support lateral earth pressure,
hydrostatic pressure and any expected high eccentric lateral pressure due to live
load or surcharge load.
The minimum internal diameter of manholes shall be 1,050 mm.
Manholes must include a ladder in their design.
Removable concrete slabs and chambers shall be constructed of precast concrete
sections or of reinforced concrete cast in-situ in accordance with the approved
drawings. The nominal class of concrete shall be C5 (350/50) for chambers.
5.5.8 Pipelines Surge Control
A mechanical surge control system should be considered for main pipelines with
lengths greater than 500 m. The pipeline surge analysis should be done by a
specialist.

5.6 Pumping Stations

5.6.1 General
Pumping Stations considered in this chapter are in the primary network.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 60/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

5.6.2 Utilities
All pumping stations shall have:
▪ Power supply via public mains;
▪ Diesel backup power supply (EDG, containerized solution);
▪ Potable water supply via public network;
▪ Sewage connection to public network;
▪ UPS for Control and emergency lighting.
5.6.3 Facility Requirements
Access should be provided from the closest public road to the pumping station.
Where access from a public road is not available then a suitable access easement
shall be created. The design of the access road shall reflect the typical size and
operating requirements of maintenance vehicles. See also Section 11.
All pumping stations require security features as follows:
▪ Must be surrounded by a perimeter protection fence or wall;
▪ Shall be equipped with security measures:
» Access control system;
» Perimeter alarm system;
» CCTV;
» Guard house (24/7).
▪ Must be well illuminated to allow routine inspection. LED lights shall be used.
Illumination shall be dimmed down during night;
▪ Must have structures to support cranes, whether temporary or permanent. The
capacity of the cranes depends on the dimensions of the pumps and other
equipment to be installed;
▪ Must have buildings for operation, maintenance and security, more details see
Section 6 and 7;
▪ Pumping stations should be designed in such a way as to allow easy
inspection and maintenance, leaving room for possible future expansions.
Each of the pumps must be fully equipped to function as an independent unit and
must be provided with all the auxiliary equipment, instruments and accessories
required to guarantee its operation under the specified conditions.

5.7 TSE Storage


5.7.1 General

5.7.1.1 Storage Criteria


The established reservoir and storage criteria was established in the MP (see
Table 19).

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 61/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 19: Storage Criteria


Item Storage Criteria
Pumping Station Sumps Based on PS design criteria and duration of
(Operational Volume) pumping to strategic storage tanks
48 hours supply of associated supply/
Strategic Storage Tanks
pressure zones
24 hours storage of site specific
Neighbourhood Tank
Neighbourhoods

5.7.1.2 Strategic Storage Tanks


Strategic Reservoirs are primarily the source of TSE during periods of maintenance
or unforeseen interruptions in supply. They ensure that 48 hours storage is provide
for in the network. The location of Strategic Reservoirs is based on land availability.
Provision for chlorination shall be considered, before the TSE enters the Strategic
Reservoirs, depending on the measured residual chlorine values.

5.7.1.3 Neighbourhood Tanks


Neighbourhood tanks will provide balancing of the peak flows required from the
Irrigation Tanks. It is envisaged that all neighbourhood Tanks will be situated below
ground and each tank will require a pumping station to pump to the associated
Irrigation Tank.
In some circumstances Neighbourhood Tanks may need to be grouped and
situated inside neighbourhood parks and possibly sites outside of the specific
neighbourhood boundary.
The Neighbourhood Tank Sites must be confirmed with the concerned authorities
prior the design starts.

5.7.1.4 Zone Boundaries


The TSE Zone Boundaries have been identified in the MP. The TSE Zone
Boundaries should be confirmed prior the design starts.
5.7.2 Storage Tanks Materials
Storage tanks should be constructed with cast in situ reinforced concrete or
prefabricated steel panels. Basic member thickness will be done as per flotation
requirements as minimum. Foundations will be designed as raft or base slab or
pile as per GIR and elevation of the structure. Movement joints are provided in the
large tanks at suitable locations to release the stresses. The joints should be
detailed according to the purpose. Large roof spans are supported by intermediate
columns with column drops and baffle walls as applicable.
5.7.3 Capacity
It is anticipated that many of the neighbourhood tanks will be located in public parks
or other public spaces where the construction of above-ground structures is not
feasible or desired. Accordingly, most neighbourhood tanks are expected to be
below-ground structures.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 62/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

A standardisation of tanks across all lots is desired to facilitate operation and


maintenance. Tank volumes of 500, 1,000, 1,500, and 3,000 m³ should be used
whenever possible. Typical layouts should be provided by the designers.
Differing tank designs or volumes may be required after analysis by the design
consultants due to local requirements or design optimisation. In such cases, a
proposal is to be made by the design consultants for review and approval by the
PMC.
In general, water tanks must comply with the specifications of the BS EN 805 and
BS EN 1508 (Requirements for systems and components for the storage of water)
standards.

5.8 Drainage
The necessary facilities for the drainage of tank areas, pumping stations areas,
valve areas and other facilities should be designed. Consideration should also be
given to the draining of the tanks themselves and the pipelines.
In particular the destination for drained TSE must be determined as part of the
design process and consultations with/ permitting from affected stakeholder must
be progressed and secured.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 63/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


6.1 General
This section includes those elements required for the design of the structures
associated with the pipelines, pumping stations, TSE tanks and buildings
necessary for the operation of the system. The structural design of the pipeline
supports and their elements should also be considered, and the special crossing
structures if required.
6.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Construction specifications;
▪ Foundation location drawings;
▪ Foundations for equipment’s, valves, tanks, structures and buildings drawings;
▪ Structural analysis report;
▪ Concrete and steel structural drawings;
▪ Pipe support drawings (typical and special support drawings);
▪ Typical Neighbourhood Tanks design;
▪ Material Take-Off;
▪ Bill of quantities.

6.2 Design Loads


The design loads should be according to the last revision of ASCE 7 “Minimum
Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures”.
6.2.1 Dead Loads
All Dead Loads are established based upon the self-weight of the structure and
with the characteristic densities listed below. The values listed below are in
accordance with the ASCE 7.
Table 20: Dead Loads
Characteristic Density
Material
(kN/m3)
Reinforced Concrete 25.0
Structural Steelwork 78.0
Sand / cement screed 23.0
Tarmac 24.0
Masonry (Dense concrete block) 22.0
Light weigh partition wall 14.0
Plaster 17.0
Glass 27.0
Natural Stone (Granite) 27.5
Backfill and Landscaping Soils 18.0

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 64/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

6.2.2 Superimposed Dead Loads


The Superimposed Dead Loads are established based upon the architectural,
building services and other building systems appropriate to the structure. The loads
listed below are general loads in accordance with the ASCE 7.
Table 21: Superimposed Dead Loads
Partition and Ceiling
Total
Floor Usage Block & Finishes IL
SDL
Wall Allowance Services
Parking - - 2.0 2.0 3.5
Escape Staircase 0.0 0.5 2.5 3.0 5.0
Lift and Escalator
0.0 0.5 2.0 2.5 5.0
Lobbies
FEC 5.0 0.5 2 7.5 7.5
Toilet 8.0 0.5 4.0 12.5 3.0
7.5
MEP Rooms 0.0 1.0 4.5 5.5
(min)
Service Tunnel - - 4 4.0 10.0
Transformer Room - - 13.0 13.0 7.5
EVA Route 0.0 1.0 4.0 5.0 20.0
BOH corridors and
1.0 0.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
circulation
Prayer Rooms 1.0 0.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Corridors and Lobbies 0.0 0.5 2.0 2.5 5.0
Roof (non-accessible) 0.0 0.5 4.0 4.5 1.0
F&B 3.0 0.5 2.0 5.5 5
Public Area - 0.5 2.0 2.5 5
Stores 5.0 0.5 2.0 7.5 7.5
Electrical Room 4.0 0.5 2.0 6.5 5
AUH Room 1.0 0.5 2.0 3.5 10
Control/Security Rooms
1 - 2 3 3
& Offices
Generators/RMU 2.0 - 4.0 6 10
ETS Room - - 2 2.0 10
Loading/Unloading - - 2.0 2.0 10.0
LV Room 2.0 0.70 2.0 4.0 7.5
Service Tunnel Roof 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.5 5.0

The total minimum superimposed loads (including partitions, finishes and service
ceilings) shall be as follows:
▪ 5.5 kN/m2 when solid block partition is used;
▪ 4.5 kN/m2 when lightweight block partition is used;
▪ 4.0 kN/m2 when dry-wall partition is used.
6.2.3 Live Loads
The Live Loads are established based upon the architectural definitions of area
occupancy use appropriate to the building structure. These live loads are
determined in accordance with the provisions of ASCE 7. Live load reduction shall
be applied in accordance with ASCE 7 (from floor live loads and for roof live loads)
as applicable.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 65/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 22: Live Loads


Uniform
Description of Live Load Point / Line
(kpa)
Anchor Shop 5 -
BOH 5 -
Cinema 5 -
Control/Security rooms & offices 3 9.0 kNb
Corridors & Lobbies 5 9.0 kNb
ETS Room 10 -
F&B 5 -
FEC Area 7.5 -
Food Court 5 -
Generators/RMU 10 -
Glazing 2 -
Loading/Unloading 10 -
LV Room 7.5 -
MEP Area 7.5 -
Parking 3.5 -
Prayer Room 5 -
Public Area 5 -
Retail 5 -
Roof (Non-Accessible) 1 -
Service Tunnel 10 -
Staircase 5 -
Stores 7.5 -
Supermarket 5 -
Toilet 3 -
Transformer Room 7.5 -
6.2.4 Sand Loads
Appropriate maintenance regimes shall be incorporated into the Operational and
Maintenance provisions of the building facilities to ensure that sand will not
accumulate on envelope surfaces, with reference to roof areas.
6.2.5 Wind Loads
The Wind Loads are established in accordance with ASCE 7 as appropriate to
building structure geometry and occupancy category. The following table provides
the design parameters applicable in the calculation of the Wind Loads for the
building:
Table 23: Wind Loads
Wind Load Design Parameter Symbol Value
Basic 3-second Gust Wind Speed (as
V 45 m/s
per D.M. Circular N. 191)
Exposure Category As per ASCE 7 -
Gust Factor G 0.85
Directionality Factor Kdd 0.85
Enclosure Classification - Enclosed
Occupancy Category (in accordance
As per ASCE 7 -
with ASCE 7)
Wind Importance Factor I 1.00

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 66/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

6.2.6 Seismic Loads


The Seismic Loads are established in accordance with UBC 97 Zone 2A. Seismic
activity is considered very low in the area and hence not considered in the design
of structures.
6.2.7 Temperature Loads
The design shall provide for the forces and movements resulting from an imposed
thermal differential load. The thermal differential load shall be applied taking
cognizance of building enclosure conditions and continuous long spans. The
following table provides the seasonal temperature variation being considered for
the building facilities.
Table 24: Temperature Loads
Location Value
Above grade level concrete structures +/- 20°C
Below grade level concrete structures +/- 15°C
Steelwork structures +/- 25°C
6.2.8 Groundwater Criteria
The groundwater conditions should be considered according to the results of the
geotechnical studies of each particular site.
6.2.9 Soil Lateral Loads

6.2.9.1 Surcharge
For all underground structures where no future development is planned, except
where a road exists, vertical surcharge loading of 20 KN/m2 will be applied over
the structure.

6.2.10 Construction Loads


Loads from construction plant and material storage will be determined for each
particular location. For all other areas, the following minimum construction loads
shall be applied.
Table 25: Construction Loads
Location Value
Construction surcharge on areas
20 kN/m2
affected by construction traffic
5 kN/m2 on slab (specific concentrated
Construction surcharge on areas
loads to be accommodated where
not affected by construction traffic
necessary)
Typically, 850 kN (and up to 4,000 kN
Maximum Crane Load depending on location) to be confirmed
for each structure

6.3 Load Combinations


6.3.1 Ultimate Limit State (ULS) Design Design
The design load combinations under the ULS condition shall be accordance with
the last edition of the ASCE 7. These Load Combinations shall be used in the

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 67/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

design of all structural elements. The Load Combinations producing the most
adverse load effects will be used in the design.
6.3.2 Serviceability Limit State (SLS) Design
The design load combinations under the SLS condition shall be accordance with
the last edition of the ASCE 7. These Load Combinations shall be used in the
analysis and design of foundation capacities and reactions. The Load
Combinations producing the most adverse load effects will be used in the design.

6.4 Materials

6.4.1 Design Life


Major components of the building, such as the main structural elements, will be
designed for the life of the building, whereas other components will require
maintenance or replacement at intervals during the building’s life. It is
recommended that the structural systems be designed to a minimum building life
of 50 years. It should be noted that other elements such as cladding, finishes,
movement joints and paint systems used to protect structural elements from
corrosion (e.g. external steelwork) will require more frequent maintenance,
typically every 15 to 20 years.
6.4.2 Concrete
The following provides the principle materials specification for concrete adopted
for the structural facilities under the scope of this report. This covers concrete
strength, reinforcement, cover provisions and durability recommendations.

6.4.2.1 Concrete Strength


The minimum requirements for concrete strength are indicated in the table below.
Table 26: Grade of Concrete
Cube
Cylinder Strength
Description of Structural Element Strength
(MPa)
(MPa)
Reinforced Concrete Foundations 40 50
Reinforced Concrete Slabs and Beams 40 50
Reinforced Concrete Walls and
48 60
Columns
Blinding 20 25
Slab-on-Grade 40 50
Underground tank wall and slab 40 50

6.4.2.2 Concrete Cover


If specific values are higher than those specified below, these are defined on the
associated General Notes Drawings.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 68/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 27: Concrete Cover


Cover
Surface and Exposure Environment
(mm)
External Exposure Conditions
Concrete for Foundations 75
Concrete Cast in Water 100
Concrete in Substructures Below Ground (with or without
75
membrane protection)

Internal Exposure Conditions


Slabs (reinforcement diameter < 32 mm) 40
Slabs (reinforcement diameter > 32 mm) 40
Beams 40
Columns 40
Walls 40
Stairs 40

6.4.2.3 Concrete Properties


Additional concrete properties are defined as specified below.
Table 28: Concrete Properties
Modulus of
Modulus of Coefficient of
Concrete Elasticity Poisson’s
Elasticity Thermal
Grade (Short Ration
(Long Term) Expansion
Term)
C48/60 38.0 19.0 0.2 10x10-6/°C
C40/50 35.4 17.7 0.2 10x10-6/°C
C32/40 31.9 15.9 0.2 10x10-6/°C
C20/25 22.4 11.2 0.2 10x10-6/°C
6.4.3 Reinforcement Material
The reinforcement materials characteristics are shown in the following table.
Table 29: Reinforcement Material
Reinforcement ASTM Yield Strength
Epoxy Coated
Description Designation (MPa)
Typical Reinforcement Not Applicable A615 460
Reinforcement to be Welded Not Applicable A706 460
Welded Wire Fabric Not Applicable A1064 460
Note: for shear calculations the maximum yield strength to be used is 420 MPa.

6.4.3.1 Concrete Crack Widths


Limitations of Concrete Crack Widths shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ACI 207.2R “Effect of Restraint, Volume Change and Reinforcement
of Mass Concrete”, ACI224R “Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures”. Limiting
cracks widths considered for the categories of limit state occurrence are presented
in the following table.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 69/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 30: Concrete Crack Width


Exposure Limiting Crack-
Commentary
Condition Width
For all exposure classes except X0
and XC1 (National Annex to
EN 1992-1-1, Table NA.4) in which
General structural
0.3 case appearance is often the main
element
criterion, although the preservation
of aggregate interlock for shear
strength should be considered
Element in contact
0.2 -
with soil
Element in contact
0.1a -
with water
▪ *a Cracks due to thermal changes and drying shrinkage width will be limited
to 0.2 mm as recommended of ACI 207.2R.

6.4.3.2 Concrete Mix and Durability Recommendations


Concrete mixes will be selected to meet the requirements specified based upon
the soil investigation in order to comply with the concrete durability requirements.

6.4.3.3 Watertight Construction


▪ Water tightness of the concrete structure will be achieved by the combination
of the following measures.
▪ Concrete Mix - Concrete mix with low heat generation properties with low
chloride diffusivity characteristics.
▪ Crack Widths - Control of crack widths.
▪ Construction - Minimizing construction joints in the external / exposed slabs.
▪ Water-bars - Specification of water-bars at all construction joints.
▪ Waterproofing Membrane - Application of a waterproofing system to the
external surface of the underground base, roof slabs and partial wall as
required.
6.4.4 Steelwork
The following provides the principle materials specification for steelwork adopted
for the structural facilities under the scope of this report. This covers steelwork
strength reinforcement and durability recommendations.

6.4.4.1 Steelwork Strength


If specific values are required higher than those specified below, these will be
defined on the associated drawings.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 70/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 31: Structural Steel Designation and Strength


Yield
Steel Work Description Designation Strength
(MPa)
Universal Beams and Columns ASTM A572M 345
Channel, Angles and Plates ASTM A36M 250
High Strength Plate ASTM A572M 345
Square and Rectangular Hollow
ASTM A500M / Grade B 315
Sections
Circular Hollow Sections ASTM A501M / Grade B 345
Pipes ASTM A53M / Grade B 240
Bolts
As per
Braced Frame Connections ASTM F3125 SC / Class A
AISC
As per
Full and Partial Moment Connections ASTM F3125 / Class A
AISC
As per
Simple Shear Connections ASTM F3125 X or SC
AISC
Threaded Rod Anchor Bolts ASTM F1554 / Grade 55 380
Welding Electrodes E70XX -
Metal Deck ASTM A653 SQ / Grade 33 230

6.4.4.2 Steelwork Standard Sections


In accordance with procurement requirements, all steelwork can adopt standard
sections as defined by British Standards. However, the material shall be procured
to demonstrate compliance to ASTM standards.

6.4.4.3 Steelwork Durability


For buildings using structural steel, design life shall be achieved using protective
coatings. For steelwork exposed outside of the building envelope, a protective
coating system will be employed. For steelwork fully enclosed within the building
envelope, a zinc rich primer shall be applied. Metal decking shall be galvanized by
the manufacturer. An inspection and maintenance schedule shall be employed to
assure protective coatings are performing as specified and replaced as needed.

6.5 Serviceability Performance

6.5.1 Steelwork Deflection Limits


The following table provides the Steelwork Deflection Limits:
Table 32: Structural Steel Serviceability
Structural Steel
Load Combination Limit
Component Description
Vertical Deflection of Typical Floor
Dead + Live L/240
Slabs and
Live L/360
Beams
Concrete Shrinkage L/500
Vertical Deflection of Floor
Dead + Live L/240
Elements Supporting
L/360
Facade Elements Live
(15 mm limit)

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 71/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Structural Steel
Load Combination Limit
Component Description
L/500
Differential Live
(10 mm limit)
Dead + Live L/240
Vertical Deflection of Roofs
Live L/360
Supporting Brittle Elements
Wind* L/360
Dead + Live L/180
Vertical Deflection of Roofs Not
Live L/240
Supporting Brittle Elements
Wind* L/240
Dead + Live L/120
Live L/180
Vertical Deflection of Roofs Not
Wind L/180
Supporting Any Elements
Wind (overall
H/500
building)
Wind (inter-storey) H/400
Wind (Glazing
H/300
Lateral Deflection of Structures Mullions)
Seismic (inter- As per UBC
storey) requirements
Cranes** Live L/1000

▪ L = beam/slab/assembly span (for cantilevers, adopt 2 x cantilever length H =


building/store y height
▪ Wind load shall be 0.7 x ‘Component and Cladding’ wind load.
▪ ** Allowable Crane Deflection Limits shall be confirmed in agreement with the
selected crane manufacturer.
▪ The above deflection limits do not consider pre-cambering. Pre-cambering
may be used to reduce the total deflection as deemed necessary.
6.5.2 Concrete Deflection Limits
The following table provides the Concrete Deflection Limits that shall be adopted
in the design of the structures.
Table 33: Concrete Steel Serviceability
Structural Concrete Component
Load Combination Limit
Description
Vertical Deflection of Flat Roofs Not
Live L/180
Supporting
Brittle Elements Wind* L/180
Dead + Live L/240
Vertical Deflection of Floor Elements Not
Live L/360
Supporting Brittle Elements Differential Live L/500
Total Load after L/480
Vertical Deflection of Floor or Roof
attachment of Non- (20 mm
Elements Supporting Brittle Elements
Structural Element limit)
Vertical Deflection of Floor or Roof Total Load after L/480
Elements Supporting Brittle Façade attachment of Non- (15 mm
Elements Structural Element limit)

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 72/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Structural Concrete Component


Load Combination Limit
Description
Total Load after
Vertical deflection of transfer beams attachment of Non- L/800
Structural Element
Wind (overall
H/500
building)
Lateral Deflection of Structures Wind (inter-storey) H/400
Seismic (inter- ASCE 7-
storey) 05
▪ L = beam/slab/assembly span (for cantilevers, adopt 2 x cantilever length);
▪ H = building/store height;
▪ Wind load shall be 0.7 x ‘Component and Cladding’ wind load;
▪ The above deflection limits do not consider pre-cambering. Pre-cambering
may be used to reduce the total deflection as deemed necessary.
6.5.3 Structures Movement Joints
Control measure for below grade construction without movement joints shall
include:
▪ Control of shrinkage and early age thermal stresses by limitations on the
design and specification of the concrete mix, including minimization of
Portland cement content and substitution by fly ash or blast-furnace slag and
silica fume.
▪ Selection of coarse aggregate with a low coefficient of thermal expansion.
▪ Specification of infill strip joints (late pour strips) at locations to be agreed but
no more than 50 m spacing and cast circa 45 days after the concrete structures
are cast either side.
▪ Control of on peak concrete temperature and temperature difference across
the section during placing and early age curing, including appropriate site
monitoring.
▪ Design of shrinkage and temperature control reinforcement, determined by
analysis of the type of concrete used, restraint conditions expected and effect
of local geometrical constraints.
▪ Limitations on concrete pour sizes and timing between pours.
▪ Two shrinkage calculation models should also be considered.
▪ Early shrinkage with pour strip in place (up to 45 days after casting).
▪ Long term effects with the slab acting with the retaining walls. The effects of
restraints provided by the retaining walls, piles and core walls should be
modelled by using spring with stiffness equivalent to the bending stiffness of
these elements.
▪ The large tanks are subdivided into 6 discreet structural zones separated by
movement joints. The joints continue through the height of the structures.
▪ Width of the joint is governed by the seismic displacement of each structure.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 73/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

7 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


7.1 General
Architectural elements shall comply with the latest Saudi Building Codes,
International Building Code (IBC), NFPA Code and other Saudi codes, whichever
is more stringent.
The design shall incorporate disabled access and movement in and around the
buildings that are to be accessed by public and employees in accordance with the
requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act
Accessibility Guidelines (ADA-ABA Guidelines).
All buildings shall be highly energy efficient to contribute towards being able to
achieve an overall energy sustainable target. In such cases every effort shall be
made by the Designer to achieve the highest lev-el in energy efficiency.
Fire and life safety assessment and design shall be in accordance with the related
NFPA.
The buildings that should be considered as part of the TSE system are:
1. Operation building for:
▪ Administration, control, security, electrical – and control equipment.
2. Pump house for:
▪ Main Pumps.
3. Guard house:
▪ At gate for security, for two guards and CCTV workstations.
4. Warehouse for:
▪ Storage for spare parts and consumables.
5. Workshop building for:
▪ Piping, mechanical, electrical and instrumentation works.
6. Electrical building / Variable Speed Drive (VSD) building:
▪ Dedicated building if not part of the operation building or pump house.
7. Laboratory Building:
▪ In charge of building for water sampling and analysis.
8. Electrical Substation Building:
▪ Substation building for switchgear and electrical control panels.
9. Car sheds:
▪ For 15 cars per facility.
10. Emergency Generator container or building.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 74/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

All the buildings should have access control, and should be fenced with perimeter
illumination and CCTV surveillance (individually or for a group of buildings,
depending on the location).
7.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Equipment/systems specifications;
▪ Architectural materials specifications;
▪ Building architectural drawings;
▪ Building finishing drawings;
▪ Building plumbing (water and sewage plumbing if required) and drainage;
▪ Building electrical systems and illumination drawings;
▪ Building communications systems – structured network drawings;
▪ Building firefighting systems and fire detection drawings;
▪ Landscape drawings;
▪ Construction specifications;
▪ Material take-off;
▪ Bill of quantities.

7.2 Operation Buildings


7.2.1 Introduction
In a pump station the operation building shall be designed for 24/7 for two (2)
operators and 2 security personnel. Standard operation will only require day shifts,
but in case the SCADA system cannot supervise a station, back up operation 24/7
is required in pump stations.
During dayshift up to 8 additional employees (management, administration,
housekeeping, maintenance) will work in this building. Office space for 6 people
and lockers for 10 males and 5 females shall be provided.
The operation building is preferably a one storey structure and shall be divided in
to the following rooms:
▪ Station control room;
▪ Control equipment room;
▪ Electrical equipment room;
▪ Battery room;
▪ Gas extinguishing equipment room (bottle room);
▪ HVAC room;
▪ Electrical workshop;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 75/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Offices;
▪ Prayer room;
▪ Social / meeting room;
▪ Toilets / washrooms (male/female);
▪ Locker Rooms;
▪ First aid room;
▪ Document room;
▪ Corridor;
▪ Storeroom;
▪ Room for cleaning equipment.
The station control room, electrical equipment room and the control equipment
room shall be equipped with a double floor. The clearance of the double floor shall
be 0.80 m.
Access to equipment rooms shall allow easy and safe transportation and
installation of the equipment cabinets. Clearance of building access doors to the
equipment rooms shall be 2.30 m.
Equipment rooms shall have 100% spare space to accommodate future phases.
7.2.2 Floors
▪ Electrical rooms: double floor with synthetic floor covering (antistatic);
▪ Battery room: ceramic tiles, acid resistant and antistatic;
▪ Offices, social-meeting room: synthetic floor covering;
▪ Wet rooms, HVAC-room, electrical Workshop, gas extinguishing room,
corridor: ceramic tiles.
7.2.3 Battery Room
The battery room shall be equipped with an eye-wash sink. The Battery Room shall
be equipped with a supply air opening and an exhaust air fan. The required air
exchange and the resultant wall openings shall be designed in accordance to
BS EN IEC 62485-2.

7.3 Pump House


The Pump House will hold the groups of pumps associated to each pipeline. The
Pump House should be as close as possible to the source, either the WWTP or
the Strategic Tanks. The building must have at least:
▪ Lifting equipment;
▪ Communications to the Operation Building, the Workshop, the Central Control
Room;
▪ Electrical room for electrical switchgear and VSD drives (with cable
basement);

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 76/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Control equipment room (with false floors);


▪ Battery room;
▪ Easy access for trucks.

7.4 Other Buildings


Other buildings to be considered in the design process are:
7.4.1 Guard House
The Guard House ensures access to the main facilities such as the control building,
the warehouse or the workshop, being the control point of entrances and exits to
the facilities.
It is considered that it will be a single-level building, enough to house two (2)
people. The building must have at least:
▪ Kitchenette;
▪ Sanitary facilities;
▪ Air conditioning equipment;
▪ Communication system to the main buildings of the area.
7.4.2 Warehouse Building
The Warehouse Building is designed to protect all material or equipment necessary
to give continuity to the different activities carried out in the different areas. Is
estimated one (1) building per lot.
The Warehouse Building should be developed on one floor. The Warehouse
Building can be in the same area of the Workshop Building. It is estimated that
there could be 10 people in the building
Enclosed spaces for offices, services and smaller warehouses are concentrated in
the building. Minimum internal work environments are defined as follows:
▪ Material and equipment reception area;
▪ Office area;
▪ Sanitary services;
▪ General storage area;
▪ Outside storage area;
▪ Air conditioning room;
▪ Electricity room;
▪ Dressing rooms and lockers area (for female and male);
▪ Telephone and instrumentation room.
Aisles should be at least 4 m wide to accommodate forklifts and other equipment.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 77/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

7.4.3 Workshop Building


All work related to preventive and corrective maintenance of machinery and
equipment in the areas will be carried out in the Maintenance Building. Is estimated
one (1) building per lot.
The Workshop Building should be developed on one floor. The Workshop Building
can be in the same area of the Warehouse Building. It is estimated that there could
be 20 people in the building
Minimum environments are defined as follows:
▪ Deposit area.
▪ Workshop area for the maintenance and repair of mechanical and electrical
equipment;
▪ Administrative and Service office area;
▪ Archive and playback area;
▪ Sanitary services;
▪ Dressing rooms and lockers area (for female and male);
▪ Service area (air conditioning room, electricity room, voice and data);
▪ Cleaning deposit;
▪ Reception of materials and equipment. To be repaired or maintained;
▪ Warehouse Area;
▪ Welding shop.
In the area of electrical and mechanical workshops, an overhead crane with a
capacity of 5 tons should be installed, in such a way as to make the handling of
equipment under repair or maintenance more flexible through the overhead crane.
Aisles should be at least 4 m wide to accommodate forklifts and other equipment.
Provision should be made for local exhaust ventilation system for the removal of
any dust, fumes or vapours produced inside the Workshop Building.
7.4.4 Laboratory Building
All water analysis related to the TSE will be carried out in the laboratory. The
building should have all facilities to do the required water analysis. Is expected that
4 persons will work in the building per shift.
The building should include as minimum:
▪ Sanitary services;
▪ Office;
▪ Space to store the chemicals used in the analyses;
▪ Space to store the glassware used in the laboratory;
▪ Space to store gas cylinders;
▪ Space for fume hood;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 78/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Space for laboratory desk (with enough space for the different laboratory
equipment required for the water analysis based on the requirement control
parameters);
▪ Space for computer desk;
▪ Space for waste/used chemicals disposal;
▪ Space for Laboratory sinks;
▪ Space for glassware washing;
▪ Electricity room;
▪ Communications with operation building;
▪ Conference area;
▪ General deposit area;
▪ Dressing rooms and lockers area (for female and male);
▪ Security doors.
For all the above building and if there are very near it should considered a First Aid
Room, a Dining Room and a Prayers Area.
The First Aid Room should have attached a bathroom sited so as to be easily
accessible from all buildings. The door for the first aid room should be large enough
to allow the passage of a stretcher. The floor and wall should be covered with
smooth washable material easy to clean and adequate lighting and ventilation must
be provided.
The Dining Room shall be adequately ventilated and provided with sufficient tables
and chairs to accommodate at least 30% of the workers at a time. The floor area
of the meal room excluding the area occupied by equipment, fittings and furniture
other than tables and chairs or benches shall not be less than 1 m2. per person.
The dining room should be provided with windows facing an outdoor area, which
allows the enjoyment of the diners. It is necessary that the dining room has a door
to the outside, to allow the diners to go outside.
The Prayers Area should enough for all the staff that work in the facility.
Al building should have a parking area enough for the staff. Also parking space for
visitors should be considered.
7.4.5 Emergency Generator Container
The emergency generator container should withstand outdoor conditions, and shall
include the fuel tank. The fuel tank must consider the necessary elements so that
in case of fuel spillage it spreads
7.4.6 Electrical Substation Building
Electrical substations will require a building to install the switchgear and electrical
control panels. The Substation Building superstructure should be constructed from
fire-resistant, low-maintenance building materials.
The substation should have a perimeter security fence.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 79/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

7.5 Staffing of Buildings and Sites


The estimated minimum permanent and temporary staff at each facility site are:
▪ Operators: 2 persons per shift;
▪ Administrative staff: 6 persons (facility manager, account, secretary,
warehouse supervisor, workshop supervisor, laboratory supervisor);
▪ Engineers: 2 per shift;
▪ Electricians/ Mechanics:
» 20 technician and workers (workshop);
» 10 technician and workers for field work per shift.
▪ Security: 2 persons per shift (guard house);
▪ Store keepers: 10 persons;
▪ Cleaning workers: 4 persons (for all the facilities);
▪ Laboratory: 4 persons per shift (laboratory workers 2 and 2 field laboratory
personal);
▪ IT personal: 2 persons.
Shift considered of 12 hours per day.

7.6 Fire Resistance

7.6.1 Fire Resistance Ratings


The fire resistance ratings are derived in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 5000. For concrete works, fire resistance ratings shall be achieved through
the design of the element’s geometry, reinforcement cover and reinforcement
provisions. Where fire protection of steelwork is required, such provisions shall be
achieved by additional treatment.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 80/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

8 MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


8.1 General
This chapter describes the main construction requirements for mechanical works
at all stations of the System.
As a general rule the design of the mechanical components, mechanical systems
and materials shall be identical for all Stations, if not specified otherwise.
The mechanical requirements for different equipment’s like pumps, valves, piping
and fittings, lifting equipment and HVAC that will be part of the TSE pumping and
storage system are presented in the following section.
8.1.1 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design consultants
as minimum:
▪ Motor and Pump Selection Study (to clarify basis of the pump/motor selection
based on operation and application requirements, including list of pumps of
the project);
▪ Data sheet and/or specification for pumps, including characteristics curve,
arrangement drawing including motor units;
▪ Data sheet and/or specification for all valves, including dimensional drawing
and sectional drawing;
▪ Design calculation and drawings for surge vessels (if required);
▪ Data sheet and/or specification for air compressor to be used for surge vessel
plant, including sizing calculation for compressor selection (if required);
▪ Data sheet and/or specification for other equipment including drawing for e.g.
dismantling joint, isolation joint etc.;
▪ Design documents for auxiliary systems e.g. cooling water system (if
required), firefighting system etc.;
▪ Piping class specification;
▪ Specification for piping and piping components;
▪ Piping and valve specifications;
▪ Line and valve lists;
▪ Isometric drawings (where is required);
▪ Valve Data Sheet;
▪ HVAC design documents;
▪ Maintenance spares list;
▪ Operation and maintenance manuals;
▪ Material Take-Off;
▪ Bill of Quantity.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 81/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

8.2 Pumping Stations


The pump station will collect the water from storage reservoirs at specified
locations, through horizontal split case pumps, and discharge to the various
locations as per table mentioned below. The pumps for pumping station are
designed for maximum daily consumption.
A pumping system may consist of inlet piping, pumps, valves, outlet piping, fittings,
rising mains. When a particular system is being analysed for the purpose of
selecting a pump or pumps, the pump operation conditions shall be defined based
on system hydraulic analysis considering geodetic head between start and
endpoint, maximum roughness of the pipeline, design flow scenarios. All system
required operation points shall be covered as close as possible to the best
efficiency points of the pumps.
8.2.1 General Criteria
The Pumping Station design must follow the below indicate considerations.
▪ Install a pumping system that is a complete, integrated unit consisting of pump,
motor, shaft, coupling, frame and base as manufactured at the factory;
▪ Pumps: vertical turbine, end suction or horizontal split case type depending on
application. Centrifugal pump with horizontal split case type is preferred if
applicable;
▪ Pumps shall be close-coupled frame-mounted type;
▪ Pumps shall be located within the pump house and shall have easy service
accessibility;
▪ Selected pumps based on the highest efficiency where possible. Head
increasement of 5% shall be possible with replacement of impeller;
▪ Pumps that allow installation of a larger impeller to meet future requirements
wherever possible;
▪ Install stand-by pumps is always required;
▪ Pumps shall be selected suitable for 1,800 rpm wherever possible;
▪ Centrifugal pumps where the shutoff head is not more than 25% greater than
the operating head;
▪ Certification from the pump manufacturer that the mechanical seals for pumps
are suitable for the maximum expected temperature;
▪ Pressure gauges at upstream and downstream of pump between pump and
isolation valves;
▪ An air release valve for evacuation of air entrapment should be installed on
pump casing;
▪ Provide pump motors that are not overloaded at any point on the pump’s
operating curve. If not specified otherwise the actual power output of the
motors must be selected to meet the required shaft power of the driven
equipment at its duty point, multiplied by a factor of 1.2 for motors up to 250

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 82/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

kW and 1.15 for motors above 250 kW and using the next larger standard
motor size;
▪ Non-slam type nozzle check shall be provided in the pump discharge piping to
prevent backflow and damage of pumps;
▪ Isolation valves shall be provided at pump suction and discharge piping along
with dismantling joints for easy service removal. Isolation valve at pump
suction side can be butterfly type. Ball valve shall be used at pump discharge
side.
8.2.2 Pump Selection
All centrifugal pumps shall be of the ANSI / HI type, according to the service
provided, being able to have a horizontal or vertical axis according to the
application or specific pumping service.
The typical selection criteria for centrifugal pumps, which are considered the most
appropriate for this type of services with water, are their design data (flow rate or
capacity (Q), discharge head (H), speed of rotation (n) and Net Positive Suction
Head (NPSH)), the properties of the fluid pumped, the application, the place of
installation and the applicable regulations, specifications, laws and codes.
The pumps shall be selected in such a way that all required operation scenarios
can be covered with efficiency as near as possible to BEP of the pump. For
application with many desired operation points, variable speed drive shall be
considered for energy saving. Decision if VSD drive is used shall be addressed in
pump selection study.
Main design features for classification of centrifugal pumps are:
▪ Number of stages (single stage / multistage);
▪ Position of the shaft (horizontal / vertical);
▪ Pump casing (radial, e. g. volute casing / axial, e. g. tubular casing);
▪ Number of impeller entries (single entry / double entry);
▪ Type of motor (dry motor / dry rotor motor, e. g. submerged motor / wet rotor
motor, e. g. canned motor, submersible motor).
Other pump classification features include:
▪ Mode of installation;
▪ Nominal diameter (for the pump size, as a function of the flow rate);
▪ Rated pressure (for wall thickness of casings and flanges);
▪ Temperature (for example for the selection of cooling equipment for shaft
seals);
▪ Fluid pumped (abrasive, aggressive, toxic fluids);
▪ Type of impeller (radial flow / axial flow depending on the specific speed);
▪ Self-priming ability;
▪ Casing partition, the position of the pump nozzles, an outer casing, etc.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 83/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Sump pumps shall be proposed for pumping drainage water that is collected in the
concrete sumps within the pump chambers.
8.2.3 Pumping Unit Set-Up
There are three ways of setting, considering the type of pump and the inlet
chamber:
▪ Pumps of vertical shaft sunk in the water of the pump well;
▪ Pumps with vertical or horizontal shafts set in a dry chamber located beside
the pump well;
▪ Pump of generally horizontal shaft located above the water level.
Within the arrangement mentioned in (a) three further cases are possible:
▪ Pump is under water and the driving motor is above the water level
In this case the electric motor is directly joined to the vertical shaft of the pump and
is located in a water-free, dry place. The advantage of this solution is the relatively
small space-requirement (there is no suction pipe and foot valve) and the easy
start and operation (priming is not needed because air cannot penetrate into the
suction pipe). Its shortcomings are, especially in case of a large level difference
between the motor and the pump, the difficulties in fitting the bearings in the vertical
shaft, loss in efficiency (due to the several guide bearings), increased corrosion,
and difficulty of checking, maintenance and repair (the pump should be drained
first). In cases of small delivery sometimes flexible shaft-driven pumps can be
used.
▪ Driving motor and main pump are above the water and the first stage under
the water level
By applying a first stage submerged part, the pump gets inflow water. No priming
is necessary before starting. The level of water delivery is controlled by the upper
part, thus the pump in fact, has a double stage made up of a low-pressure
(.submerged stage) and a higher-pressure stage. This solution partly eliminates
the above-mentioned shortcomings, by having several advantages (power take-off
shaft with lower capacity, main part of the pump is easy to maintain). This solution
is applied mostly to pumps of high pressure.
▪ Pump and driving motor under the water level
To these belong the submerged and deep-well pumps. The submerged pump is
set in a driven well.
8.2.4 Design and Performance Requirements
The suction conditions for all pumps shall be carefully determined for the rated
conditions as well as for any other operational cases the pumps will ever be
subjected to according to the operating philosophy.
NPSH Available shall be provided with sufficient safety margin over NPSH
Required taking into account the properties of the pumped water and the selected
pump type as well. Pump manufacturers’ requirements in this respect shall be fully
observed.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 84/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

By the selection of the pumps, the designer shall take all required measures to
allow operation with minimum water level in the upstream tanks. Special care shall
be taken in NPSH calculation and configuration of the suction piping in order to
avoid any disturbance (e.g. vibration, cavitation) during operation with the minimum
water level in the tanks.
Not mandatory are also the number of stages, the impeller arrangement, the pump
speed or whether a single or double suction design will be used.
The pump station shall be equipped with all means required to ensure that the
pumps are only operating between their minimum and maximum allowable
continuous operating capacity.
Design of the adjacent pipe work and of the pumps shall be such that the allowable
forces and moments on the pump nozzles are not exceeded under any
circumstances. It may be required that the loads will be higher than given in or
extrapolated from pump standards and therefore the loads shall be coordinated
with/confirmed by the pump manufacturer.
Pump casing internal design pressure shall be 10 % higher than the maximum
pressure occurring during operation, which is the maximum suction pressure plus
the shut off head of the pump, or the maximum pressure during surges and other
transient conditions, whatever is higher.
Maximum tank levels and shut off heads of pumps shall be considered when
determining the maximum pressure. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 150 %
of the above defined internal design pressure.
The pump flange rating shall be according with the next higher pressure rating.
8.2.5 Fire Fighting Pumps
The firefighting pumps shall be designed as per national standards or relevant
British standards. Firefighting pumps shall be designed to satisfy the requirement
of the fire hydrants within pumping station and other relevant areas/buildings.
Storage reservoir shall be used for the fire pump station. A rising main length and
levels shall be calculated according to the location of fire hydrant within pumping
station and other relevant areas/ buildings.
Pumps shall be motor operated with 4 poles, 380 V / 13.8 kV and having a
maximum pump rotation of 1,800 rpm.
Further details on firefighting see Section 11.

8.3 Station Piping


8.3.1 Sizing of Station Piping System
The pipe sizes shall be determined based on hydraulic and process design.
In general the flow velocities shall not exceed:
▪ 2.0 m/s up to the pump suction side;
▪ 3.5 m/s for all other station water pipes.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 85/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Higher velocities are acceptable at special piping sections only, such as control
valves, flow meters, etc. but shall not exceed 6 m/s.
The designer shall carefully check the suction requirements of the pumps with
respect to NPSH (Net Positive Suction Head) and flow pattern and if necessary
lower velocities shall be selected.
For the pressure design of the piping system designer shall calculate the highest
possible pressures occurring in the individual piping sections, taking into account
all steady and unsteady state conditions.
The required minimum wall thickness for the station piping shall be calculated using
the equation stated system design code.
▪ The minimum thickness shall be sufficiently defined considering internal
design pressure and external load.
The internal design pressure of equipment as well as for flanges shall be selected
in accordance with the next higher rating over the highest pressure occurring
during operation.
8.3.2 Materials for Station Piping
Carbon steel pipe with suitable coating and lining shall be used for station piping.
8.3.3 Internal Lining of Station Piping
To avoid internal and external corrosion, the piping and piping components shall
be protected.
The internal lining of station piping shall be done with high quality epoxy (e.g. fusion
bonded epoxy) or polyurethane.
Application shall be follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
8.3.4 External Coating of Station Piping
Above ground station piping shall be coated with high solid epoxy plus
polyurethane as top coat or polyurethane.
Buried station piping shall be coated with 3 layer HDPE or polyurethane.
8.3.5 Piping Layout
The piping layout in stations with existing equipment and piping shall be done in
such a way as to avoid interference with the existing piping systems, structural
steel and concrete, electrical cable trenches, conduits etc. Interconnections with
existing piping or equipment must be defined in separate interface reports, which
are part of the final design.
8.3.6 Piping Flexibility
The piping shall be designed to have sufficient flexibility to prevent expansion or
contraction causing excessive stresses in the piping material, excessive bending
moments at joints, or excessive forces or moments at points of connection to
equipment or at anchorage or guide points.
This shall be achieved by using piping arrangement such as L-shaped, U-shaped
or Z-Shaped configurations in the normal routing of any piping system.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 86/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The above ground piping shall be laid on pipe supports. Supports shall be designed
to support the pipe without causing excessive local stress in the pipe and keep the
desired freedom of movement.
Contractor shall carry out a pipe stress analysis as part of the final design proving
that stresses for piping and equipment, including tanks and nozzles, are kept within
the allowable limits.
8.3.7 Dismantling Pieces and Flange Adaptors
Dismantling pieces or flange adaptors shall be used at valves, flow meters and
other equipment installed in straight pipe runs for easy dismantling if required
during final design and depending on the piping configuration.
Flange adaptors shall only be used where no axial forces have to be transmitted.
8.3.8 Pump Suction Piping
For the pump suction piping in addition to the stress calculation, the designer, in
close co-operation with the pump manufacturer, shall carefully check the piping
arrangement and the suction pipe lengths with respect to velocity distribution at the
pump inlet which shall meet the requirements of the pumps for proper operation.
The design shown in the drawings is deemed to satisfy these requirements for the
pump types under consideration. However, all the necessary measures for
straightening the flow (e.g. elbows with straightening vanes, flow straighteners in
straight pipes, special fittings) shall be foreseen.
8.3.9 Filling and Drainage
For filling and drainage of station piping it is necessary to provide suitable filling
bypass valves, drain valves and vent valves.
The drain valves shall be at low points and the vent valves at high points.
Filling bypass valves shall be designed to handle the possible differential pressure.
8.3.10 Strainers
The Strainers shall comply with the following specifications:
▪ Shall be H or Y type and comply with international standards with rapid purge
arrangement;
▪ Standard flanged connection;
▪ Body and cover in ductile iron GGG40 or cast steel with epoxy coating;
▪ Effective filtration is required;
▪ Compact design;
▪ Easy and Fast to Maintain;
▪ Top cover removal, only;
▪ Flat stainless steel strainer mesh perpendicular to flow optimizes pressure
drop;
▪ Possibility to be equipped with an autonomous programmable flushing valve,
allowing fast;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 87/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ flushing without removing top cover;


▪ Pressure rating to be defined based on hydraulic calculation.

8.4 Valves

8.4.1 General Design Guidelines


The following general considerations shall be adhered to during design:
▪ For valves with an operating mechanism, the preferred direction of closure is
clockwise.
▪ Valves, other than service connection valves with DN smaller than DN50 mm,
designed for anti-clockwise closure, shall be marked to indicate the closing
direction.
▪ Valves shall be designed for water flow velocities which can reach the values
given in Table 34 in steady flow conditions.
▪ All internal surfaces which are in continuous contact with the water in the
pipeline shall be resistant to corrosion and ageing by the selection of materials
or shall be protected by appropriate means.
▪ All external surfaces of the valve (including bolts) which are in continuous
contact with the surrounding soil, water or atmosphere shall be resistant to
corrosion and ageing by the selection of materials, or shall be protected by
appropriate means.
▪ The valves shall withstand without damage, an internal pressure equal to the
higher of the two values: PEA or 1,5 x PFA.
▪ The valves in the closed position shall withstand without damage a differential
pressure applied to the obturator equal to the lower of the two values:
1,5 x PFA or PFA + 5. If the MAWP indicated for the valves is higher than this
value, the differential pressure applied shall be equal to MAWP.
▪ The use of dissimilar metals in conjunction with a corrosive environment shall
not be permitted, e.g. steel pipes and non-ferrous valves.
▪ Depending on the size, and hence weight of a valve, it shall be supported
independently of the pipes to which they connect. In any event valves greater
than (>) 300 mm NB shall be independently supported.
▪ Valves for flow path settings shall always be motorized.
▪ Maintenance valves are preferable manual valves. If a maintenance valve is
operated more than 1 per month and exceeds a diameter of DN400 mm, it
shall be motorized as well.
▪ To prevent water hammer effects valves in the flow path shall be slow,
minimum closing times shall be based on transient hydraulic analysis.
▪ Valves shall be designed for water flow velocities which can reach the values
given in Table 34 in steady flow conditions.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 88/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 34: Maximum Water Velocity


PFA Flow Velocity
(bar) (m/s)
6 2.5
10 3
16 4
25 5
8.4.2 Isolation Valves
Isolation valves are used for the sectioning of pressurized pipelines. It is mandatory
the installation of isolation valves in the derivations, junctions of roads or railways,
river or canal crossings and, in general, at singular points of the layout.
For the pipelines it shall be generally foreseen to have an isolation valve every
5 km, exact locations shall be further evaluated by the detail design consultants.
▪ The valve is designed to operate in two basic positions: open or closed;
▪ The intermediate positions should only be considered as temporary positions;
▪ Normally, these valves will be installed in chambers or manholes.
In addition to the points indicated, the installation of the isolating valves must be
fixed depending on the diameter of the pipe in such a way that all criteria are
considered and meet the following:
▪ Generally motorized remotely operated gate valves shall be used at each
outlet of the TSE network;
▪ Gate valves shall be used within the TSE network for diameters less than
DN300 mm and;
▪ Butterfly valves in pipes with a diameter equal to or greater than DN300 mm.
In general, isolation valves will be PN 16. The valves will be designed for working
pressures in accordance with BS EN 1074-1.
With regard to the conditions to be met by the valves with respect to the design
parameters, it is necessary to take into account the provisions of the BS EN 805
standard.
▪ PFA ≥ DP;
▪ MAWP≥ MDP;
▪ PEA ≥ TP.
If required, gate valves of larger diameters and higher nominal pressures than
those indicated may be used, being able to reach nominal pressures of 40 bar
(PN 40).
In accordance with the BS EN 1074-1 Valves intended for water systems come
under the PN designation and shall be designed in such a way that their
characteristic pressures PFA, PMA and PEA, conform to Table 35 for the
corresponding PN:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 89/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 35: Pressures


PFA MAWP PEA
PN
(bar) (bar) (bar)
6 6 8 12
10 10 12 17
16 16 20 25
25 25 30 35

8.4.2.1 Check Valves


The check is used in pumping stations and allows the flow in only one (and always
the same) direction thus preventing back flow when the fluid in the line reverses
direction. The main importance of this function is twofold:
▪ To prevent damage to upstream equipment that can be affected by reverse
flows such as pumps and measuring equipment;
▪ To prevent reverse flow after system shutdown (water hammer).

8.4.2.2 Butterfly Valves


Butterfly valves are used where space is limited. Unlike gate valves, butterfly
valves can be used for throttling or regulating flow as well as in the full open and
fully closed position. If a butterfly valve will be used as flow regulation device, the
design shall demonstrate that the device is the only available solution.
Within the TSE network butterfly valves can be used as isolation valves.

8.4.2.3 Automatic Vent Valves


Automatic vent valves shall be of the combined type consisting of one air-release
and one air-vacuum type with one large orifice and one small orifice. The air
release valve (small orifice) shall be connected to the body of an air-vacuum valve
(large orifice) to form a combined unit.
The valve shall be able to release small air pockets during operation over the small
orifice, as well as larger air volumes during filling and further allow air entering to
pipe during emptying or negative pressure over the large orifice. The large orifice
shall be sealed by a float and the valve body shall be designed to avoid premature
closing of the valve by the discharging air. The small orifice shall be sealed by a
float at all pressure above atmospheric except when air accumulates in the valve
body. When automatic vent valves are required for pipeline surge protection
reasons, the valve shall be of the non-slam type. In such case, the air valves shall
be equipped with additional orifice disc or surge check valve to limit the maximum
air release capacity, in order to avoid surges caused by quick closure of the air
valve when the water column has reached the float with uncontrolled velocity. Easy
replacement of components must be possible. Maintenance requirements shall be
reduced to a minimum.
The structure of all valve bodies and floats shall ensure free movement of the float
within the valve body to avoid the danger of the float being arrested in any
intermediate position within its travel length. All seats, seals, floats shall be field
replaceable without the need for any special tools.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 90/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

8.4.3 Washout Valves


Washout valves shall be provided at lowest points of the network, in some selected
points, for draining and flushing the pipeline. Offline washout valves shall be also
used where necessary.
There will be no direct discharges to the foul sewer network to avoid risks of cross
contamination.
The preference is to discharge the flow to sewage or drainage manholes where
available, however where there are no drainage manholes nearby, the flow will be
discharged to washout sumps.
The diameter of the washout valves will depend on the volume of water to be
discharged, which in turn depends on the location of high and low points, the
diameter of the pipe, etc.
Table 36 gives the recommended washout valve minimum diameters to be used
depending on the size of the pipe.
Table 36: Recommended Washout Valve Minimum Diameters According to Pipe Size
DN Pipe DN Washout Valves
(mm) (mm)
DN ≤ 200 80
250 ≤ DN ≤ 350 100
400 ≤ DN ≤ 600 150
700 ≤ DN ≤ 900 200
DN > 900 300
A means of isolation of the washout from the main shall be provided. This is to
ensure that the washout can be exchanged without isolating the main.
8.4.4 Station Piping Valves

8.4.4.1 General Design Requirements


This sub-section refers to the different valve types to be installed in the station
piping, such as isolation valves, check valves, control valve, pressure safety
valves, etc.
The pressure rating of the station valves shall be defined above the maximum
pressure occurring in the relevant piping section, where a valve will be installed.
Where a change of the pressure class coincides with the location of a valve, this
valve shall belong to the higher pressure class. Valve design shall also take the
hydrostatic test pressure into account.
The valve materials shall be carefully selected with respect to suitability and
corrosion resistance for the use under the specific operating conditions, especially
with respect to the water quality.
Heavy valves shall be adequately supported independently of the pipes to which
they are connected in order to prevent the pipe having to bear the weight (subject
to stress analysis).
All process related valves shall have electrical motor actuators, if not specified
otherwise.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 91/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

8.4.4.2 Isolation Valves


Isolation valves shall be used to shut off sections of the station piping from each
other for switching operations during normal operation, but also for maintenance
and repair purposes.
Generally the isolation valves in the station piping system shall be flanged butterfly
valves, gate valve or ball valves depending on size and application.
Butterfly Valves up to and including PN25 can be of the double eccentric type and
butterfly valves for higher pressure rating shall be of the triple eccentric type.
Ball valves shall be preferred for all pump discharge lines, all instrumentation
connections and drains.
Gate valve shall be resilient type.
Design of the valve shall be suitable for the transported medium. Water quality
shall be taken into account for selection of valve type.

8.4.4.3 Check Valves


Check valves to be installed shall be non-slam type.

8.4.4.4 Control Valves


For all control valves technical data must be provided to clearly identify valves, i.e.
flow direction, type, nominal diameter, nominal pressure, seating, KV- or CV-value
including the proof that the valves will operate without cavitation damage during all
operational cases.
The control valves shall be used in the water pipeline system to control flow and
pressure by modulating their opening in response to the actual measured process
values of throughput or pressure.
The valves shall be designed for continuous operation and in such a way that
cavitation is avoided. Multiple throttling effect shall be considered with the aim to
reduce cavitation. If incipient cavitation cannot be avoided, the design shall be
appropriate to support such cavitation without damaging the valve. Material parts
coming into contact with incipient cavitation shall be protected in an appropriate
way to withstand these conditions.
The control characteristic shall be adapted in such a way that a fine regulation and
adjustment is also achieved in difficult opening / closing conditions. The throttling
effect should as far as possible be controllable for minimal flow rates. The operating
characteristic of the valve may be achieved by the opening characteristic of the
valve itself or by the opening-speed/characteristic of the actuator or by a
combination of both.
For normal duty, axial flow control valves shall be used. Where the specific
hydraulic conditions require special valve types or other valve types are a better
solution for economic reasons these valves shall be supplied with suitable internal
parts that guarantee operation for all operating conditions without inadmissible
cavitation.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 92/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Relevant diagrams for Kc and Cv values shall be submitted with a calculation


showing the valve's hydraulic suitability for the required service conditions.
Control valves shall not generate noise in excess of 85 dB(A), measured at a point
1 meter downstream of the valve outlet and 1 meter from the pipe centreline.
Where this requirement must be exceeded because of physical limitation, suitable
sound attenuators shall be provided in terms of special valve trim, in-line
attenuators, insulators and enclosures to satisfy the noise requirement.

8.4.4.5 Pressure Regulation Valves


Overall, the Pressure Reducing and Sustaining Valves (PRSV) shall provide
operators and owners with the following advantages:
▪ Downstream reduction of pressure by avoiding high pressure in the distribution
network in permanent regime;
▪ Upstream sustentation of pressure insuring a strong pressure level in the
transport network;
▪ Flow limitation through an adjustable lift limiting assembly for the rationing
regime;
▪ External controls of the valve;
▪ Setting up of effective corrective and preventive maintenance.
To sum up, PRSV shall enable calm operation of various works to be achieved and
better service to users to be provided.

8.4.4.6 Other Valves


In order to avoid unallowable pressures due to temperature rise in sections of the
station piping which shall remain isolated shall be equipped with spring type
pressure safety valves. Set pressure shall be selected in such a way that at design
relief capacity the pressure corresponding to the pressure class of the pipe in which
they are installed will not be exceeded.
Flap valves may be needed at the end of tank overflow lines for the purpose of
closing the line and avoid ingress of sand and animals.

8.5 Mechanical Lifting


The lifting equipment and their installation shall be designed in accordance with
applicable codes; industry standards; local, state, and federal regulations.
Triple movement power-operated overhead crane shall be installed inside each
pumping station power generation building and chemicals building to serve those
buildings.
The crane load shall be at least 25% in excess of the weight of the heaviest part of
the supplies to be lifted by the crane.
Cranes with a capacity up to 3 tons should be of the manual type while these with
a capacity of more than 3 tons shall be of the power-operated types for lifting and
lowering and the remaining movements will be manual.
The major components of the Overhead crane are:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 93/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ A traveling base with a traveling rail on either side;


▪ The End carriage on both sides which houses the wheel for the crane
movement and also supports the top girder. It also houses a geared motor that
provides the drive to the rollers enabling the crane to move longitudinally;
▪ The Top Girder provides the side movement of the hoist and trolley. The hoist
and trolley assembly are mounted on the top girder;
▪ The hoist and the trolley arrangement possess separate motor and gear
assemblies for the chain hook. It also has a drive arrangement for the
sideways movement on the top girder.
8.5.1 Electrical Overhead Travelling Crane (EOT)
The crane shall be electrically operated with dual speed on each motion with step-
less electronic speed control & fitted with main and auxiliary hoists. The crane shall
be of the overhead type with individual electric motor (s) for each motion & shall
have a travelling trolley with a powered hoisting system.
The crane shall be provided with a clear description of the Safe Working Load
(SWL) .
The overhead crane systems normally consist of two types of travel to handle the
materials. The two types of motion are:
▪ Long Travel Motion;
▪ Longitudinal Travel Motion.
8.5.2 Electrical Requirements
380 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hz, power supply for the hoist shall be made available
through switch fuse/MCCB unit mounted at standing height at a convenient
location near each hoist/EOT.

8.6 HVAC
Minimum requirements for design of Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning
(HVAC) systems are shown in this section.
8.6.1 Design Criteria for Indoor Located Air-Conditioning Units
The design criteria for indoor located air-conditioning units are shown in the
following table.
Table 37: HVAC Indoor Design Condition
Room
Units
Summer DB Winter DB Air Noise
Capacity
Area / Space Temperature Temperature Humidity Level
Split
(°C) (°C) [% RH] from dB
(%)
(A)
Offices, social rooms
control, computer,
23 ± 2 21 ± 2 50 - 60 45 2 x 100%
telecom rooms,
SCMS electronic and

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 94/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Room
Units
Summer DB Winter DB Air Noise
Capacity
Area / Space Temperature Temperature Humidity Level
Split
(°C) (°C) [% RH] from dB
(%)
(A)
relay rooms and
similar rooms
Switchgear rooms for
132 kV, 220 kV or
400 kV SWGs.
Battery &
charger/LVDC 27 ± 2 21 ± 2 50 - 60 45 3 x 50%
rooms, LVAC
distribution, and A/C
plant room and
similar rooms
Stores, janitor rooms,
staircases, corridors,
indoor aux.
transformer,
capacitors, reactor, 23± 2 21 ± 2 50 - 60 45 3 x 50%
compensator and
inverter rooms,
trenches/shafts and
similar rooms
3 x 50
Power transformer
< 65 < 45 50 - 60 45 Ventilatio
room
n only)
Other process areas
such as in N+1
wastewater facilities Outside air Outside air where N
like blower rooms, temperature + temperature + Not is the
80
pumping stations, 60°C 60°C controlled number of
rooms with various (Maximum) (Maximum) units
installed process required.
equipment

Note: If rooms of different standby percent requirements are grouped under one system
due to practical reasons the higher percentage standby (i.e. 100%) shall be considered.

Note: If RH% controlled rooms and RH% uncontrolled rooms are grouped under one
system due to practical reasons both these types of rooms have to be considered in the
calculation of heater capacity required to control RH% because it is the common return air
duct which is the point of sensing.
Note: The indoor conditions of the kitchen and toilet rooms will not be controlled.

8.6.2 Design Criteria for Outdoor Located Air-Conditioning Units


The design shall be based on the following outdoor air-conditions:
1. The ambient design conditions for HVAC design will be based on ASHRAE
0.4% & 99.6% annual temperature for > 20 years (based on ASHRAE 2017
recommendations for Riyadh , Saudi Arabia.)

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 95/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

a) Summer
I. Dry bulb temperature 48ºC
II. Wet bulb temperature 28ºC
b) Winter
I. Dry bulb temperature -2.5ºC
c) Daily Range 14ºC
d) Design temperature for condenser 60ºC
2. Maximum wind speed: 160 km/h;
3. Occurrence of sand storms: frequently.
It is important to take in consideration that the HVAC equipment must be selected
to operate in maximum 60°C (DB) 28°C (WB) in summer and able to sustain -5°C
(DB) in winter
8.6.3 Air Temperature and Humidity
The external design condition shall be based on respective specific project
requirements and environmental conditions and site location. Outdoor design
conditions shall be obtained from the closest weather station to the facility location
and ASHRAE database.
The outdoor air is often very humid and laden with fine sand dust from the desert
and salt particles from the seaside.
Thereby the outdoor air is extremely corrosive to all metal parts of the entire
structure and installations.
Therefore, only the highest available material standard shall be applied with special
coating and painting of all exposed surfaces to prevent the equipment from all
corrosion effects.
In case additional auxiliary building for a guard house, a fire pump room, insulator
washing pump room, potable-water pump room are considered inside a facility,
separate decorative wall mounted type mini split units with concealed thermostat
wiring and refrigerant piping shall be provided to maintain the indoor design
temperature of 23±2°C for guard house and 30±2°C for other/facility rooms. The
capacities of this equipment shall be de-rated for the specified local outdoor air-
conditions. In case of non-availability of the certified de-rated capacity from the
Manufacturer of the equipment, the nominal capacity shall be reduced in the design
calculation by 30%. Condensed water connections with drain-traps to the main
drain pipes shall be provided.
Any area/room not covered by the a.m. a/c-units shall be air-conditioned according
to similar rooms.
HVAC equipment such as air cooled chiller, air cooled condenser, packaged air
conditioning unit, DX split unit etc., shall be selected to deliver required cooling
capacity at maximum outdoor ambient temperature.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 96/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Outdoor HVAC equipment such as air cooled chiller, outdoor condensing unit,
packaged air conditioning unit, DX type split unit, etc., shall be able to operate at
extreme outdoor ambient temperature without out tripping.
8.6.4 General Requirements
The detail designer shall consider the below general requirements for HVAC
system.
▪ Space for HVAC equipment such as AHU room, Chiller yard, HVAC equipment
yard, etc., shall be sized as per guidelines, recommendation provided by
HVAC equipment Manufacturer;
▪ Clearance shall be provided around HVAC equipment as per Manufacturer
recommendation for replacement of component and to carry out maintenance
activities;
▪ HVAC equipment such as air handling unit, chiller, packaged air-conditioner,
air cooled condensing unit for DX type AHU which are installed at ground floor
level shall have sand trap barrier around equipment area to prevent
accumulation of sand near HVAC equipment;
▪ If HVAC equipment such as air handling unit or chiller or packaged air-
conditioner or air cooled condensing unit for DX type AHU proposed to install
at roof floor of the building, then the designer shall provide stair case access
to reach equipment at roof for maintenance and component replacement
purpose;
▪ If packaged AC or AHU or air cooled condensing for DX type AHU, proposed
to install at roof floor of the building and there is no stair case access to reach
roof floor, then lifting arrangement (davit type) shall be provided at roof for
component replacement such as compressor, motor, fan, coil, filter, etc.,
during maintenance;
▪ One (1) potable water supply connection shall be provided near to AHU,
chiller, packaged air conditioner, within a ten (10) meters distance for cleaning
purpose. Floor surface shall have proper slope to drain all service water during
cleaning. Electrical power supply socket shall be provided in HVAC equipment
area for electrical power supply connection to cleaning pump during
maintenance;
▪ All condensate drainage line shall be insulated to avoid formation of
condensate. Condensate pipe material shall be metallic type, cleaning access
point shall be provided for condensate drainage line;
▪ Suitable walkways, step cross over above HVAC ducts, chilled water pipes
etc., shall be provided;
▪ If the room has equipment or panel which has voltage level in excess of 1,000
Volts inside the room then, HVAC equipment shall not be located in that room,
only a non-maintainable duct shall run inside the room;
▪ Individual power supply shall be provided to each HVAC equipment, so that in
case of trip due to HVAC fault, it shall not trip upstream breaker or trip power
supply to other equipment/system;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 97/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Emergency push button with guard, electrical isolator shall be provided near
to HVAC equipment (AHU, chiller, chilled water pump, packaged air
conditioner, fans, etc.);
▪ Breaker with over load protector shall be provided for each motor of AHU,
chilled water pump etc.;
▪ Separate breaker shall be provided for electrical heater, humidifier;
▪ HVAC fresh air intake shall have detector as per requirement for HSE. Gas
detector shall be installed at HVAC fresh air intakes. Type of detector and
number of detectors at each fresh air intake shall follow HSE requirement. Gas
tight damper shall be installed at fresh air duct at downstream of gas detector,
to close the fresh air passage tightly, upon detection of gas.
8.6.5 Air System
The detail designer shall select the type of equipment to be considered such as
Packaged type air-conditioner or DX type AHU or chilled water type AHU or
Terminal air-conditioning unit (such as room split air-conditioner or Fan Coil unit
etc., located in space itself).
For small building such as Gate House, (or space where small air-conditioner units
are allowed to keep inside of space such as Power skid), Terminal air-conditioning
unit are preferred. Packaged units are preferred for small capacity or where
moderate size HVAC system capacity is arrived, so that packaged air-conditioner
can be used without excessive multiplicity of units (not less than 50% capacity of
each package unit).
Air Handling units are preferred for larger system.
8.6.6 Air Velocity in HVAC Ducting System
The duct work shall be designed on equal friction method. The velocity of air in the
duct and its friction rate which shall be used during the detailed design are
summarized below.
Table 38: Velocity of Air and Friction Rate in the Duct
Maximum Friction
Maximum Velocity
HVAC Duct System Rate
(m/s)
(Pa/m)
Supply Air
Main duct small system (less than 6 0.8
3,000 LPS)
Main duct large system (above 3,000 LPS) 8 0.8
Duct branch with more than one diffuser or 4 0.8
register directly connected
Flexible ducts to outlets. (maximum length 2 0.8
3 m)
Duct branch to single diffuser or register 3 -
Return Air
Main duct small system (less than 6 0.8
3,000 LPS)
Main duct large system (above 3,000 LPS) 8 0.8

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 98/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Maximum Friction
Maximum Velocity
HVAC Duct System Rate
(m/s)
(Pa/m)
Transfer duct 4 0.5
Branch duct 4 0.8
Free Flow through ceiling plenum 2 -
Through slots of ceiling plenum 2 -
Exhaust Air Duct 4 0.6
Fresh Air Duct 4 0.5

Duct work shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal and all works shall be in
accordance with the current SMACNA standards.
Ductwork routings shall avoid going through noise sensitive areas or shall be
treated to avoid the transmission of noise to that area.
The friction rate of branch and sub-branch duct shall not exceed the friction rate of
its main and branch duct.
8.6.7 Water Velocity in Chilled Water System
The limitation of water velocity and pressure drop (or water friction loss) in chilled
water pipes shall be provided as below:
▪ Minimum pipe size for chilled water application shall be not be less than
Ø 25 mm;
▪ For pipe size Ø 50 mm and less:
» Maximum velocity shall be limited to 1.2 m/s.
▪ For pipe size above Ø 50 mm:
» The water velocity shall be limited so that the pressure drop in pipe shall
not exceed 400 Pa/m;
» The average pressure drop shall be 250 Pa/m or less;
» Velocity in excess of 1.2 m/s is acceptable for pipe size above Ø 50 mm.
8.6.8 Heat Transmission Data
Unless otherwise indicated, the heat transmission coefficient for the cooling load
calculation shall be re-checked by the designer.
Construction material shall be selected in such a way that the U-values will not
exceed the following:
▪ Roof u = 0.30 (W/m2/K);
▪ Outside walls u = 0.45 (W/m2/K);
▪ Windows u = 1.50 (W/m2/K);
▪ Steel Doors u = 2.00 (W/m2/K) (for single glass);
▪ Aluminium Glass Doors u = 5.60 (W/m2/K) (insulated).
Data such as U-valves, thermal resistances or thermal conductivities shall be taken
only from the following sources:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 99/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ ASHRAE fundamentals volume;


▪ Carrier design handbook;
▪ Values provided by Manufacturers of particular construction materials.
8.6.9 Ventilation Air
Outside fresh air shall be provided in order to achieve one or more of following:
▪ For human occupancy;
▪ Maintain pressure at indoor room;
▪ Make up air for extracted air;
▪ Maintain minimum fresh air change rate;
▪ Ventilation cooling.
ASHRAE 62.1 and Saudi Building Code SBC 501 shall be followed for guidance of
minimum requirement of fresh air flow rate and exhaust air flow rate to provide
acceptable indoor air quality.
8.6.10 Space Pressurization
Unless otherwise indicated or required, the return air flow rate of the air-conditioned
areas shall be 95% of the supply air quantity. This is to create a slight positive
pressure in the building to prevent the Infiltration of humid, dust-laden air into the
building. However, the battery and CO2 cylinder rooms, kitchen and sanitary rooms
shall have slight negative pressure.
8.6.11 Air Filtration
For the classification of the air filtration the ASHRAE Standard 52 shall be applied.
The filter efficiency shall be measured and defined by the dust filter coloration
method according to this standard (with synthetic dust). Filter efficiencies are to be
provided for the indicated areas as shown in Table 39.
Table 39: Filter Efficiencies
Area/Space Air Filter Efficiency
Control rooms, electronic rooms 85
Telecom, computer and office rooms 85
Switchgear rooms, electric workshops 75
Sanitary rooms, stores, other rooms 75
Fan cooled units (Indoor AC) shall be provided with cleanable aluminium filters or
equivalent as appropriate.
8.6.12 Air Flow Velocities
The maximum air flow velocities shall be as follows:
Table 40: Maximum Air Flow Velocities
Air Flow Velocity
Room, Equipment
(m/s)
In air-conditioned rooms 0.15 - 0.25 at 1.5 m a. fl. l.
Through bag type air filter insets 1.5 - 2.0
Through air cooling coils 1.5 - 2.5

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 100/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Through air grilles, registers or diffusers 2.0 - 2.5


Through facade air louvers 1.0 – 1.5
Through perforated floor tiles 1.5 - 1.5
The duct work shall be designed on basis of the equal friction method for a
maximum friction of 4 Pa/m of duct length (or 12.5 mm per 30.5 meters).
For the final design of the above-mentioned air flow velocities, the induction effects
of the jet air distribution and the maximum allowable sound pressure level shall be
considered too.
8.6.13 Packaged Air Conditioning Units
Machinery shall be of types and manufacture readily available in Saudi Arabia and
suitable for installation in direct sunlight. Filters shall be considered and, if
necessary to maintain the conditions, re-heaters and/or humidifiers.
Packaged air conditioning units assembled on a skid shall be of roof mounted type.
8.6.14 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management
Fire dampers will be positioned in all ductwork crossing fire walls. Fire dampers
will be Included in supply, return and extract ductwork at each fire zone crossing.
They will be triggered from a fusible link connection sited in the damper.
Installation shall conform to relevant NFPA Standards
Smoke / Heat detectors shall be positioned in all areas. A fire condition sensed by
the detectors will shut off the relevant FAHU through the fire annunciator panel and
activate the smoke extract fan.
Typical floor corridors shall be provided with smoke management system as
follows:
▪ Smoke extract fan shall be located on roof to extract smoke from the spaces
as per NFPA via common fire rated duct with smoke fire motorized damper at
each floor.
▪ Makeup air may be provided using makeup air fan located on roof if required.
All smoke extract fans shall be interlinked to the fire alarm system. Fire Dampers
shall be provided for areas like LV room, Electrical/Telecom Rooms, Server
Rooms, among others. The smoke extract fans shall be 2 hrs fire rated @ 400 °C.
In order for smoke extract and ventilation system to work effectively a make-up
system shall also be provided. Make up/Fresh air intake openings shall be
strategically located at the walls of ground floor at lower levels to compensate for
the ventilation and smoke extract air. The makeup air inlets shall be complete with
sand trap louvers/filters. Damper operation shall be integrated with fan by using
motorized control damper. However, the smoke control design will only be carried
out at design development stage in line with local authority requirement.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 101/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

9 ELECTRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


9.1 General
This section is intended as a guide for electrical design of electrical facilities and
equipment’s associated with the TSE required facilities.
9.2 Engineering Deliverables
Minimum engineering deliverables that shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Electrical equipment specifications;
▪ Electrical equipment technical data sheets;
▪ Electrical load list;
▪ Indoor Equipment Layout drawings;
▪ Indoor cable routing layouts;
▪ Main cable routing layouts;
▪ Cable installation details drawing;
▪ Electrical equipment list;
▪ System earthing design study;
▪ Earthing system layout drawing;
▪ Lightning Protection Systems study;
▪ Lightning system layout drawing;
▪ Outdoor lighting calculation study;
▪ Outdoor lighting layout;
▪ Installation details drawings;
▪ Cathodic Protection Study;
▪ Cathodic protection drawings;
▪ Electrical Equipment site layout;
▪ Cables list;
▪ MV cable sizing calculations;
▪ LV cable sizing calculations;
▪ Major equipment sizing calculations;
▪ Diesel generator sizing calculation;
▪ Key Single Line Diagram;
▪ MV Single line diagram;
▪ LV Single line diagram (for each distribution board);
▪ MV Protection and metering drawings;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 102/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ LV Protection and metering drawings;


▪ Electrical System Studies (Short circuit, Power Flow, Motor Starting);
▪ Motor control schematics;
▪ Lighting and small power equipment in buildings layout;
▪ Building services cable routing layout;
▪ Indoor lighting calculation study;
▪ Material Take-Off;
▪ Bill of Quantity.

9.3 General Arrangement and Electrical Points of Interface


For pump stations requiring MV loads, the assumed power for these pumping
stations is drawn from the available supply in the project area and would consist
of two independent feeders of 33 kV, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply from Saudi
Electricity Company.
Power feeders gets connected to simple 33 kV Gas Insulated System (GIS).
Further via 33 kV cable link, GIS is connected to primary side of step down
transformers.
The power gets stepped down further via 2 nos. 33 / 13.8 kV transformers to feed
power to 13.8 kV MCCs and the other auxiliary LV loads via 2 nos. 13.8 kV / 400 V
transformers. The secondary of step-down (13.8 kV / 400 V) transformer will be fed
to LV MCC/Switchboard consisting of two main incomers, one standby generator
incomer and the required outgoing feeders.
For pump stations having LV loads the assumed power for these pumping stations
is drawn from the available supply in the project area and would consist of two
independent feeders of 400 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply from Saudi Electricity
Company.
These MV/LV MCC/Switchboards will be installed inside the respective MV & LV
MCC rooms. Separate areas/rooms will be provided for step-down transformers
and DGs. Diesel generator set is provided for 100% emergency backup for
essential LV loads of pumping station or as agreed with client.
The 13.8 kV MCC will be designed to provide power (for TSE pumping stations) to
the following but not limited to loads below:
▪ Main TSE pumps with starters;
▪ 13.8 kV / 400 V two numbers of transformer feeders.
The 400 V MCC will be designed to provide power (for TSE pumping station) to
the following but not limited to loads below:
▪ Other associated pumps;
▪ Building services;
▪ PLC system;
▪ Necessary auxiliary services and motorized valves;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 103/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Fire pump control panel;


▪ Surge system.

9.4 Voltage
Standard voltages and applications anticipated for the pumping stations and
related stuffs. It is assumed to be 13.8 kV, 3 phase, 60 Hz for medium voltage
system and 400 V, 3 phase, 5 wires, 60 Hz for low voltage system as per
requirements for LV loads.

9.5 Frequency and Power Factor


Standard frequency of 60 Hz will be applicable for all electrical and instrumentation
systems. System will be designed for power factor of minimum 0.95 and above to
reduce the power loss and to improve the performance of power feeding system,
by using the power factor upgrading units of suitable capacities.

9.6 Classification of Loads


Electrical loads shall be classified as performing a service which is:
Vital service - A service which, when failing in operation or when failing if called
upon, can cause an unsafe condition of the process and/or electrical installation,
jeopardize “life-safety” systems, or cause major damage to the installation. Some
of these loads are designated as “emergency” loads by some national codes.
Essential service - A service, which, when failing in operation or when failing if
called upon, will affect the continuity, the quality or the quantity of product
produced.
Non-essential service - A service that is neither vital nor essential. Loss of
electrical power supply can be tolerated for an undefined time without any serious
effect on operation.

9.7 Voltage Drop


The voltage drop for the various parts of the electrical system shall be held within
the values indicated in the following items. The values are referred to the nominal
voltage of the system. The voltage drop calculations in case of re-acceleration of
a group of motors after a short voltage drop shall be based on the short circuit
impedance value of the motors.
The general permissible maximum overall worst case voltage drops shall be as
follows:
▪ At the consumer terminals at rated power: 3%;
▪ At the motor terminals during start-up: 15%;
▪ Supply cables for lighting and no-break equipment: 2%;
▪ Supply cables for distribution boards at rated power: 2%;
▪ At the bus bar of distribution boards during start-up of largest motor: 12%.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 104/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The voltage available at the motor terminals during start-up will in any case be
adequate to ensure the start-up or re-acceleration of the motor (even at full load
where required) without damage of the motor.
However, at connection point to SEC distribution network, for non-repetitive
voltage variation, or voltage dips with motor-starting or power system switching,
the voltage variation shall not exceed 7% of the fundamental nominal voltage under
normal circumstances, as per The Saudi Arabia Distribution Code.
The maximum start-up voltage drop of 15% or 7% (at connection point to SEC
distribution network) is the sum of voltage drop in the cables, the bus bars and
transformers for motor feeding.

9.8 MV Gas Insulated System (GIS)


33 kV GIS shall be provided as simple system consisting of two bays only. Each
bay shall comprise:
▪ Surge arrestor;
▪ Disconnectors;
▪ Circuit breaker;
▪ Ground switches;
▪ Current Transformer (CT);
▪ Voltage Transformer (VT).
The aim of use of these simple GIS is to ensure possibility of transformers
switching without communication with upstream stations that are owned and
operated by third party.
MV GIS may be either for indoor or for outdoor installation (outdoor is preferable).
Related protective relays shall be located in respective panels located in LV room.
Status signals and measured values shall be communicated with SCADA system.

9.9 33 kV Cable Links


Cable links between 33 kV GIS and power transformers as well as (if applicable)
between gantry and 33 kV GIS shall be established with single core XLPE
unarmoured cables installed in single point bonding arrangement.

9.10 Power Supply from Electricity Provider


The designer must take the necessary steps to investigate with the electric service
provider in the area the availability on the electric power system, as well as the
possible connection point and other service requirements. The permits and other
necessary forms must be prepared, consigned from the designers and the
approval should be received approved from the electricity provider before the
contractors start any activity.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 105/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

9.11 Power Transformers


The transformers shall be either 33 kV / 13.8 kV oil-cooled type with low losses, in
accordance with IEC 60076 of suitable kVA rating. There shall be two transformers
per station. Each transformer shall be designed for the total station load. With one
(1) transformer all pumps required for the design flow rate can be operated. Each
power transformer shall have on-load tap changer at the primary voltage side which
will regulate secondary voltage to nominal value.
The power transformers will be installed in outdoor transformer boxes with oil catch
basin and fire protection wall.

9.12 Medium Voltage (MV) Distribution


MV Distribution must be designed in accordance with IEC 62271-1 and the local
available standards. The 13.8 kV switchgear shall be located in the air conditioned
MV Switchgear Room of the respective Electrical Building.
The switchgears for the pumping stations shall contain two (2) bus bar sections,
each supplied via one (1) feeder breaker and connected with normally open bus-
tie breaker. Each feeder circuit is to be designed for the total station load, which is
connected to both bus bar sections.
In case of power loss of one bus bar section, Change Over Device shall ensure
closing the tie in breaker after corresponding incomer (of section without power) is
opened – Break-Before-Make. Thus, parallelism of power transformers shall never
be allowed and bus bar may be dimensioned based on short circuit impedance of
one transformer only (no parallel operation of transformers).
Short circuit rating shall be considered for 3 seconds duration.

9.13 Distribution Transformers


For feeding the low voltage level of all pumping stations, respective 13.8 / 0.4 kV
distribution transformers with off-load tap changer shall be installed.
Each pumping station shall be equipped with two (2) distribution transformers
where one (1) is designed for the full station load.
The distribution transformers will be installed in outdoor transformer boxes with oil
catch basin and fire protection walls.

9.14 Low Voltage (LV) Distribution


LV distribution will be designed in accordance with IEC 61439and the local
available standards. Cubicles shall be dead-front type, modular cubicle pattern,
metal enclosed, floor mounted, free standing, air insulated busbars with 1000 V
rated insulation voltage and 600 V rated operational voltage manufactured to
BS EN IEC 61439-1. Power monitoring units - multifunction meters on all main
incoming and selected outgoing feeders with connected load linked to energy
management system, digital voltmeters, ammeters, and indication lights on each
incoming section.
The power supply for the low voltage station consumers at each pumping station
shall be derived out of the following switchboards:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 106/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

a) Main Distribution Board (MDB)


The MDB is the low voltage main distribution board for all station consumers.
The MDB in all pumping stations will consists of two (2) bus bar sections with
two (2) feeder breakers and two (2) bus-tie breaker with automatic change
over to the auxiliary service board (ASB). The MDB shall be placed in the LV
and UPS Room of the respective Electrical Building.
b) Auxiliary Service Board (ASB)
For all essential station consumers, which must remain in operation with the
support of the low voltage emergency diesel generator. The ASB consists of
one (1) bus bar section with one (1) feeder breaker for connection of the
emergency diesel generator.
c) Sub-distribution Boards (SDB)
The SDB’s will be supplied from the MDB. The SDB’s are distributed within
the station area for power supply of buildings and other process package units
like HVAC, outdoor lighting, etc. Depending on their function the supply of
SDB’s will be carried out via one or via both bus bar sections of MDB.

9.15 Circuit Breakers


MV Circuit breakers shall be of Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB) . A or more shall be
of Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) . A will be of Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
type. type.
Lighting sockets and air conditioning breakers shall be of Miniature Circuit Breaker
(MCB) type and the protection degree of the LV DB inside the buildings shall be
IP-54 and IP-56 for the boards installed outside the building.
Incoming breakers on sub-distribution boards shall be fused load isolators.

9.16 Electrical Motors


Electric motors for all main pumps, as well as for booster pumps (if applicable), will
be on 13.8 kV operating voltage.
All main pumps in pumping stations shall be driven by variable speed motors.
Medium voltage motors part of variable speed drives will be with voltage level in
range between 3 kV and 13.8 kV.
For the MV booster and main pump motors asynchronous squirrel cage induction
motors with air/water heat exchangers shall be installed.
All motors shall be designed such that the continuous maximum operational
temperature degree under the full operation and loading circumstances shall
conform with NEMA standards and based upon the ambient temperature.

9.17 Variable Speed Drive


The main pumps for all pumping stations will be driven by medium voltage
asynchronous motors/ variable speed drives with the following main data:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 107/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ One (1) Converter Transformer of oil-immersed type, ONAN cooling, primary


voltage 13.8 kV;
▪ Frequency converter with minimum 24-pulse rectifier and 6-pulse inverter with
sine filter, water-cooled;
▪ MV motors, asynchronous squirrel cage induction motors with air/water heat
exchangers.
For the frequency converter a closed circuit water cooling system with the
respective cooling circuits, water treatment, instrumentation, etc. shall be provided.
The heat removal from the drives shall be accomplished with means of an outdoor
water/water heat exchanger - chiller.
The converters in pumping stations shall be installed in the VSD Buildings close to
the Main Pump Building; the transformers shall be placed in boxes close to the
VSD Buildings.
If requirements for harmonic distortion according to IEEE 519 and The Saudi
Arabian Grid Code cannot be met harmonic filters shall be provided.

9.18 Medium Voltage Reactive Power Compensation Equipment


Where required pumping stations will be equipped with a 13.8 kV medium voltage
reactive power compensation equipment (capacitor banks) in order to ensure that
power factor is min. 0.95 inductive. The medium voltage reactive power
compensation equipment shall be metal enclosed and located outdoor close to the
Electrical Building.
The capacitor banks shall be of modular construction that means that each
capacitor bank stage shall have its own compartment. One capacitor bank will be
connected to each bus bar section of medium voltage switchgear.
Additional reactive power compensation may be needed at low voltage
switchboards.

9.19 Cables
The MV & LV cables must be armored and made of high conductive electrolyte
copper conductors and XPLE insulated with a PVC outside cover in accordance
with BS 5468 or equivalent and extruded PVC sheathed cables manufactured to
BS 5467 for external cables.
All cabling and wiring shall comply with BS 7671, requirements for electrical
installations. IET wiring regulations.
Power and Control cables shall be segregated from instrument, signal, and
communication cables. All cables and conduits shall be provided with a tag
reference numbers.
All power, control and grounding cables shall be installed as per cable
manufacturer recommendation.
The proper sizing of cables is important to ensure that the cable can:
▪ Operate continuously under full load without being damaged;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 108/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Provide the load with a suitable voltage (and avoid excessive voltage drops);
▪ Withstand the worst short circuits currents flowing through the cable.
LV cables laid outdoor shall be mainly installed in buried conduits. Installation in
ground without conduits may be allowed for some cases where consumers are
located out of main cable routes (i.e. outdoor lighting poles)
MV cables to VSDs should be installed in walkable cable ducts.

9.20 Lighting
The luminaire selection shall comply with BS EN 60598. Lighting levels will
generally be in accordance with the recommendations of the NWC code for the
interior lighting, Society of Light and Lighting guide, and relevant local standards.
The illumination levels are as follows:
Table 41: Illumination Level
Locations Lux Levels
Motors & Pump Halls 300
Offices 500
Distribution Board Room 500
Control Panel Room 500
Warehouses 150
Corridors 150
Workshop 300
Standard Power Generators Warehouse 200
Bathrooms 150
All lighting shall be provided with LED luminaries, only. This applies to indoor and
outdoor illumination, both. No mercury or HPS Lamps illumination shall be allowed.
The outdoor lighting required for each station contains the following subsystems:
▪ Road lighting (10 lx minimum illumination level);
▪ Area lighting including structures, valve and flow meter shafts, platforms and
other working places or areas outside of buildings (30 lx minimum illumination
level);
▪ Fence lighting (15 lx minimum illumination level);
▪ Entrance lighting (50 lx minimum illumination level).
The new installations for outdoor and fence lighting within existing stations shall
meet the used types (poles and lighting fixtures), as far as still available on the
market. The respective coordination and if necessary, extension and relocation of
existing lighting systems are part of the scope.

9.21 Emergency Generator Set


For power supply of the essential station consumers, connected to the ASB’s or
essential bus bars of the stations, diesel driven low voltage Emergency Generator
(EMG) ) units are required.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 109/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

The EMG’s shall be placed together with all auxiliary facilities in a separate
generator room of the Emergency generator / Firefighting Building (if applicable)
or in own container outdoor installed.
Automatic start and switch-over is foreseen in case of total power failure at the
MDB level, with synchronization and switch back to normal without any interruption
if the power returns back. The EMG shall be designed to supply the full load of the
consumers connected to the ASB or essential bus bar, the final sizing of the EMG
is subject to detailed consumer load calculations, which is part of the final design.
A day fuel tank should be suitable for operation of 24 hours.

9.22 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)


For a continuous and uninterrupted power supply of selected instrumentation,
control and communication equipment of the various stations and as well for
emergency lighting inside electrical buildings the installation of one (1) redundant
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) per station with battery back-up and 230 V AC,
60 Hz output power supply and distribution board is required.
The UPS will be installed in the LV and UPS Room of the Electrical Building, for
the batteries a separate Battery Room (classified as hazardous area) is foreseen.
For the generation of the 48 V DC, 24 V DC and any other lower voltage levels,
which may be required for the various control and telecommunication devices,
separate power supply units located in the respective cabinets are to be provided.
These power supply units shall be fed from the UPS by 230 V AC.
A redundant two battery bank system, designed for 2x 50% load each, working as
half load-parallel operation, shall have a back-up capacity for every voltage level
of 4 hours to supply all connected consumers during power outage.

9.23 Earthing
For the entire station areas an equipotential meshed grounding network is to be
provided. For stations, which are to be extended, the existing earthing network
shall be considered. The new and the existing earthing network is to interconnect
at least at two (2) locations.
The system shall be designed and installed to provide a safe and effective earthing
system in accordance with BS 7430, NEC, and applicable local regulations.
The earth resistance of the overall interconnected station grounding network shall
not exceed 1 . For minor stations without high and medium installations a
maximum earth resistance of 2  will be accepted.
For installations in new stations, UPS, SCADA and telecommunication systems
shall not be grounded separately.

9.24 Cathodic Protection

9.24.1 Station CPS


All buried new steel pipes, all the other underground metallic structures and the
reinforced concrete foundations at the pumping stations and reservoirs stations

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 110/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

shall be protected by the implementation of suitably designed impressed current


local Cathodic Protection Systems (CPS) . The station CPS will operate
independently and fully separated from the pipeline CPS.
Details on the number, type and size of transformer/rectifiers, anodes and test
points depends on the final station layout. Any existing CP installations shall be
considered and incorporated. The station Designer shall work out the final design
for layout of the local CPS, considering the actual soil resistivity and all other effects
influencing the good performance of the CPS.
Also for the station CP systems the requirement to avoid any negative impact to
any existing installations or vice versa is valid. All necessary survey works,
measurements and the implementation of bonding stations and any other
equipment are part of the scope of work.
9.24.2 Storage Tanks CPS
For each above ground steel storage tank a separate cathodic protection system
for the tank bottom shall be provided. The impressed current system with rectifier
and buried impressed current anodes shall be used.
In addition to the cathodic protection of the tank bottom, each steel storage tank
shall have separate internal cathodic protection with impressed current rectifier and
anodes installed within the tanks.
9.24.3 Pipeline CPS
Cathodic protection of the steel pipeline will be achieved by an impressed current
cathodic protection system consisting of transformer/rectifier stations, anode
groundbeds and test points installed along the pipelines.
The number of transformer/rectifier stations, type and number of anodes and
number of test points depends on the final pipeline route, the soil resistivity survey,
the number of crossings, foreign installations, availability of low voltage power,
crossings or parallel routed HV overhead lines, etc.
Before starting the works, the Designer shall perform a complete survey and
potential measurement of all the existing CP installations. After implementation of
the new systems the measurements shall be repeated to prove the correct
operation and protection of both, the new and the existing CP systems.
9.24.4 Temporary CPS
The temporary cathodic protection shall be performed with sacrificial anodes of
suitable size, terminated on the test points.
For temporary CP of the pipeline sacrificial anodes are to be placed in distances
of not more than 10 km.

9.25 Lightning Protection


The protection system against atmospheric discharges must be designed in
accordance with IEC 62305 “Protection Against Lightning” Standard or equivalent,
as well as what is indicated in this section.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 111/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Each new building and high structure within the stations shall be provided with
lightning protection facilities. The lightning system consists of 0.3 m long collector
rods (air terminals), collector lines and down conductors from hot dip galvanised
round iron (St/tZn  10 mm) and the necessary fixing, connection and termination
elements.
Buildings shall be provided with mesh-type collector lines. The collectors have to
be configured in a way such that no point of the roof is at a distance of more than
5 m from a collector.
The maximum permitted mesh size is as follows:
▪ Buildings with telecommunication or control rooms 10 x 10 m
▪ Other buildings 10 x 20 m
Protruding roof superstructures, such as ladders, chimney stacks, pipes, antenna
mounting brackets, etc. and other metallic parts of buildings which are located near
the roof (e.g. louvers of ventilation openings) must be directly connected to the
collector lines.
The number of down conductors and the minimum distance between the
conductors is given as follows:
Buildings containing telecommunication and control systems

▪ Minimum number of conductors: 4


▪ Maximum distance between conductors: 10 m
Other buildings

▪ Minimum number of conductors: 2


▪ Maximum distance between conductors: 20 m

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 112/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10 INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


10.1 General
10.1.1 Basic requirements
Basic requirement shall be considered as follows:
▪ Selection of instrumentation shall consider high long term stability/accuracy
under the prevailing environmental conditions, high reliability, low power
requirements and low maintenance;
▪ All instruments shall be of high standard industrial type;
▪ All instruments shall be solidly built using well proven high quality components
of the latest up-to-date technology;
▪ All parts of the instruments in contact with the product water shall be fully
compatible with those and shall not deteriorate under operational environment;
▪ Particular attention shall be paid to the ease of access to all instruments. The
instruments shall be suitable for mounting in visible positions with easy access
for adjustments;
▪ Measuring errors and response time shall be as low as possible;
▪ For connection of the process values to the control system electronic type
instrumentation with incorporated local digital displays shall be used. Primary
instrumentation shall be transmitters having rough and reliable measuring
cells with microprocessor-based electronics protected in a tight housing.
Transmitters of the SMART type shall be used. Where instruments are located
in inaccessible locations, remote indicators shall be provided;
▪ All instruments shall have terminal stripes (no flying leads for external
termination);
▪ Field instrumentation protection class shall be acc. to IEC 60529. Field
instrumentation shall be weather proof and rated at least to IP 65 as a
minimum. For special installations e.g. in shafts, sensors shall be certified to
IP 68 and transmitters certified to IP 67 for remote installation version (except
defined different at instrument level). Field instrumentation shall be
manufactured, assembled and tested in the factory in conformity with certified
international quality assurance and quality control standards (ISO);
▪ All hardwired signal interfaces between Instrument and electrical systems
shall take place through an interposing relay;
▪ Switches shall not be used for process measurement, analogue
measurements shall be used instead.
10.1.2 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs)
Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&ID) must be prepared, showing all equipment,
instruments and accessories, as well as interconnecting electrical lines, in
accordance with ISA standards.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 113/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Guidelines regarding instrument tagging are provided in the SCADA is described


in the “SCADA Concept Report’ reference code TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-IC-BOD-
00002.
10.1.3 Engineering Deliverables
The following engineering deliverables shall be prepared by the design
consultants:
▪ Telecom Design Basis (FOC)),
▪ Operation Philosophy;
▪ Specifications for Station Control Systems, F&G, Telecom System, Intruder
Detection, Access Control System; CCTV System
▪ Cause and Effects;
▪ Control Narratives and Alarm Philosophy
▪ Control System Architectures;
▪ F&G detection layouts;
▪ Hook up drawings;
▪ Layout drawings of equipment rooms, control rooms;
▪ Cable routing typicals;
▪ Cable routing layouts;
▪ Instrument Block Diagrams;
▪ Typical loop diagrams;
▪ Interconnection diagrams (loop diagrams);
▪ Signal lists;
▪ Data Sheets;
▪ Cables list;
▪ Instrumentation and telecommunication equipment list;
▪ Electrical Requirements List;
▪ CCTV and UHF radio requirements;
▪ Material Take-Off;
▪ Bill of Quantities.
10.1.4 Instrument Installation
Instrumentation installation should be done in accordance with standard practices.
The instrument piping material specification must specify the type / grade of piping,
tubing, valves and fittings to be used in the instrument installation after the first
block valve.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 114/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10.1.5 Instrument Connection


Each instrument shall have its own connection. Shared impulse lines are not
permitted.
Impulse lines shall be kept as short as possible, designed to be free from blockages
and directed in accordance with installation drawings, and ensuring that vibration
is avoided.
Thermowells shall be 316 stainless steel as a minimum.
Off-line instruments such as transmitters shall be 316 stainless steel.
Each individual instrument shall be supplied with dedicated process isolation
valves designed according to piping specifications, with vent and drain valves
incorporated as discrete valves or incorporated within the instrument manifold.
The size and location of any sensing point shall be such that any instrument
measures the bulk condition of the stream and not a local disturbance.
10.1.6 Instrument Valve Manifold
All pressure type measurements shall be provided with direct mount manifolds –
three - way manifolds single pressure and five-way manifolds for DP
measurements.
10.1.7 Accuracy
Unless otherwise stated, accuracy of instruments shall be a minimum of:
▪ Pressure Gauges: ± 1.0% of full scale;
▪ Electronic Transmitters: ± 0.25% of full scale;
▪ The accuracy of any instrument shall be adequate to perform its intended duty.
10.1.8 Range
The size and range of any instrument shall allow for maximum and minimum
operating conditions and the normal range of operating conditions.
10.1.9 Signal Transmission
The signal type for field Instrumentation as below table shall apply:
Table 42: Type of Signals
Signal Type Description
4-20 mA, 24 VDC smart transmitters with HART
Analogue
protocol
Discrete signals 24 VDC
Discrete motor control
24 VDC
signals
Solenoids 24 VDC
10.1.10 Cabling Requirement
Generally cabling shall be routed above ground or in trenches. All network, signal,
and power cables, installed on cable support systems inside buildings, are polymer
sheath unarmored cables.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 115/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

All field run cabling shall be armored with served steel wire or interlocked steel
armor under an extruded PVC outer jacket. Steel armor shall be galvanized.
All cables shall be routed segregated according to their voltage levels.
10.1.11 Power Supply
All systems and Instrumentation shall be supplied via the respective Uninterruptible
Power Supplies (UPS) system. Typically, redundant 220 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase
with 4 hour battery back-up for all control system equipment.
10.1.12 Grounding Systems
The grounding of measurement, control, and computer systems shall be arranged
to prevent electrical interference. Particular attention shall be given to the
arrangement of grounding circuits to prevent unwanted circulating currents in
grounding, signal and measurement conductors and screens.
Two grounding systems shall be required for Instrument systems to prevent start-
up and circulating currents of large motors and other electrical equipment from
interfering with the sensitive low current/power Instrumentation equipment:
▪ Safety earth grounding for personnel safety;
▪ Instrumentation D.C. and shield ground.
Both the safety ground and instrumentation D.C. and shield round must conform
to NEC
The Instrument ground and safety earth grounds shall be joined electrically at a
single point near a high-quality earth ground mat to prevent earth loops between
the two grounding systems.
The Instrument ground wiring shall be installed to provide a stable voltage
reference for all Instruments and PLC.

10.2 Monitoring and SCADA

10.2.1 Operation Philosophy


The whole TSE network shall be operated from an MCC located with the facilities
at City Park 1.
The MCC shall be permanently manned. It shall be possible to operate the TSE
Distribution Network from the MCC 24/7. At pump stations, controlled via Station
Control Systems (SCS) day shifts are foreseen. In addition to the Operator,
Administrators shall be available each day during day shifts.
The SCADA system shall be designed and equipped to support the Operators with
the tasks with a high level of automated functions.
The following minimum number of Operators and Administrators are proposed:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 116/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Table 43: Manning and Staffing of MCC and SCS locations


Number of Operators Number of Administrator
(hours/days) (hours/days)
MCC 2 (24/7) 1 (8/5)
1 (8/7) /
SCS (n) 1 (8/5)
(24/7 in emergency cases)
10.2.2 General Requirements
In general, the implementation of field instrumentation and SCADA system shall
provide operators with:
▪ A continuous service information through a real-time and no-interruption
monitoring of the supply of TSE into the Distribution Zones;
▪ Immediate recognition of a technical incidents;
▪ A reliable service, through an emergency mode including local data saving
and delayed remote access;
▪ Optimization of interventions and operating costs by avoiding unnecessary
works for installation, visits of maintenance action;
▪ An efficient tool to support the flow management in Central Cluster;
▪ The setting up of effective corrective and preventive maintenance.
Further information regarding SCADA and System Operation:
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-IC-BOD-00002 SCADA Concept Report
TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002 TSE Main Distribution System
10.2.3 Tasks of Operators MCC

10.2.3.1 Process Control of the TSE Distribution Network


▪ Dispatching the required water and reporting of system throughputs and
available quantities of the TSE Distribution Network as per TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-
G-EN-PLN-00002.***) This includes:
» Flow path monitoring
» Open and Close Valves *)
» Start and Stop Pumps *)
» Provide set points for Flow- and Pressure Control Systems *)
» Supervise the Water Quality **),
» Monitoring of the process parameters: pressure, temperature and flow
rate
» Ensure optimum operation and balancing of supply and demand, this
includes preparation of predictive demand forecasting
» Monitor alarms and either resolve the cause of the alarms or initiate
trouble shooting by others, in case of alarm flooding actions are prioritized
by the Operators

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 117/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

*) Typically the Command Authority between SCS and MCC shall not be
interlocked. That means e.g. a MOV can be closed or open either by SCS or MCC.
SCS and MCC-Operators shall align each other via Telephone. Normally the
process is fully controlled via MCC, only in case of system errors or requested by
MCC, SCC shall operate the process. In case the design consultants identify a
requirement of an interlock due to safety reasons (e.g. to ensure correct
implementation of a flow path direction) an interlock can be provided for special
cases.
**) The Quality of the water shall be constantly supervised and reported. The
SCADA system shall generate daily reports, showing received and dispatched
water combined with the online measured and sampled water quality. Online
monitoring and water sampling shall be provided accordingly. The status of
available samples shall also be reported. For water quality monitoring systems
reference is made to 10.3.17 TSE Quality Monitoring.
***) To be considered for future extensions are:
» The operation of decentralised systems with package units, if such a
system is to be implemented for further treatment of TSE (reduction of
TDS value, see MP);
» Operation of the neighbouring tanks and water distribution downstream of
the neighbouring tanks.

10.2.3.2 Supervision of the System Status


▪ MCC-Operators, supervise status of the process equipment, facilities and
utilities. Alarms generated shall be followed up. Supervised items are
» Tanks, Pumps, Valves , main process equipment including FF;
» HVAC *);
» F&G detection system *);
» Electrical generation distribution system *);
» SCADA communication systems, including Cyber Security status;
» Instrument air system (if required) *);
» PABX Telephone system;
» Cathodic protection system *);
» Facilities and security system.
*) The design consultants shall make the data available at the SCS stations.
10.2.4 Tasks of Operators SCS
The SCS Operators are supporting the tasks of the MCC operators. In case of
communication failures or unavailability of MCC operation, the SCS) operators
take over the works of the MCC operators for the respective station. Coordination
with MCC shall be done via Telephone.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 118/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

MCC

Redundant
communication

SCS-n Number of SCS


depends on design
Design Consultants
Process F&G

UPS All utilities shall be


supervised by the
SCS systems
Switchgear Selected number of
Alarms and Status
E-Power shall be forwarded to
Geneartion the SCS

HVAC
Instrument
Air
CMS/ Vibration and
Condition monitoring
VMS
Chemical
injection

Figure 3: SCS Overview

10.2.5 Operation of Neighbourhood Tank Stations


At neighbourhood tanks or selected TSE supply tie-in locations along the
secondary pipeline network there will be a remote operated valve and
instrumentation in order to supervise the point of delivery.
These stations are unmanned and only visited for maintenance reasons or in case
remote operation is not possible or not desired. There shall be a small control
cabinet with PLCs of these locations. of these locations.
The local HMI shall not maintain an advanced Event/Alarm list, i.e. which would
require acknowledging of alarms, since this would not make sense for unmanned
stations.
The control cabinet shall have 200% space for future extensions, such as to tie in
additional equipment (pumps).

10.3 Control Functions at MCC, SCS and PLCs


10.3.1 Local – Off – Remote Switches
Devices, like MOVs, are usually equipped with LOR Local – Off – Remote (LOR)
switches which can be locked in the Off position with a padlock.
The Operation Mode automatic will only be applicable if a device is in remote
position since the automation sequence is programmed on SCS or MCC level.
The Operation Mode manual can be executed on each level.
As soon as a device within an automated sequence is switched to local, the
sequence will fall back to manual operation.
On P&IDs the LOR switch shall be shown for Pumps, Valves and packaged
equipment.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 119/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10.3.2 Automated Sequences


The design consultants shall design automated control sequences for the
following.
Table 44: Automated Sequences
Automated Location of
LOR *) Remark
Function Implementation
Water demand
1 MCC - See chapter below
forecasts
Online Mass
2 MCC - See chapter below
Balances
Quality
3 MCC - See chapter below
Tracking
Flow path
4 setting and MCC - See chapter below
monitoring
Includes automatic
opening and closing of
Pump start and
5 SCS LOR valves, trip replacement
stop
of failed pump by
redundant pump
Redundant equipment
shall fail over
automatically, e.g. -
Failover
6 SCS LOR instrument air
sequences
compressors
- Diesel Generators
- Pumps
Includes:
Supervision of travel time
7 Valve SCS, PLC LOR
Statistics of valve
movement
Chemical
8 SCS, PLC LOR Automated injection
injection
Flow and
9 pressure SCS, PLC LOR See chapter below
Control
*) availability of a LOR switch which allows to switch to local operation in the field
or to switch the equipment off
10.3.3 Flow Path Monitoring
Valid flow path is required for pump start permissive.
Local flow path within the package limits of the pumps shall be checked by the
package supplier (suction and discharge valves).
Station Flow path shall be checked by the SCS.
Pipeline Flow path and selection of flow direction is carried out by the MCC.
Active flow paths shall be indicated in the HMI (via colour or thicker lines).

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 120/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

In some cases in the network the flow direction may change, this shall be indicated
properly.
10.3.4 Water Demand Forecasts
To distribute the available water according to the pre-determined distribution
schedule is the main task of the Operators at MCC. The Operators needs to see
in one glance how much water is available and for how long the reserves will last
according to supply targets.
In case that the water delivery schedule cannot be met, the system shall warn the
Operators. The system shall make suggestion for new supply targets.
Water demand shall be forecasted on daily, weekly and monthly basis, Basis for
the forecast shall be based on the previous consumptions of the past 5 years and
the number of consumers.
Supply targets shall be suggested by the system, based on forecasted demand
and available water resources. Available water resources shall be calculated
based on available water levels and expected supply.
Once the targets are fixed, the system shall automatically suggests flow paths and
flow set points, which will, once confirmed by the Operators, automatically
implemented.
The MCC software shall provide an HMI for configuration, which makes it simple
for Operators to configure changes in the network and new customers, etc. The
software shall also consider that any distribution beyond pre-approved daily or
weekly quantities as well as distribution to new costumers shall require manager
approval (this requirement is to remain in place as long as demand exceeds
supply).
10.3.5 Online Mass Balances (Leak Detection) and Quality Tracking
The principle shall be that the water coming in / leaving the system and the water
which is contained in the system shall always be balanced. An online Leak
detection system shall be provided which alarms water losses beyond certain
thresholds. The sensitivity of the leak detection shall be evaluated by the SCADA
Consultant. This is important especially for the pipelines, but also the flow to the
neighbourhood tanks shall be supervised online by the Leak detection system.
Mass Balances shall be reported on daily, weekly and monthly basis.
The water quality in the system shall always be monitored and tracked as far as
possible. Also quality deviations beyond certain thresholds shall be alarmed.
It shall be possible for the operators to configure the thresholds for the leak
detection system and the quality monitoring. Every change shall be logged by the
SCADA system.
10.3.6 Flow and Pressure Control
The required set points for flow- or pressure shall be suggested by the SCADA
system. Implementation of flow- and pressure control shall be carried out on SCS
level. For pump stations with N+1 Pumps the required number of pumps shall be

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 121/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

selected automatically by the SCS and confirmed by the Operator. Selection of


pumps shall be based on operation hours and availability.
It shall be possible for the Operators to provide a manual set points for flow and
pressure and provide manual opening set points (in %) for flow – and control
valves. In case the position of a control valve deviates 5% of the expected position,
the SCS shall generate an alarm.
Pump station flow and pressure control shall support:
▪ Set point ramping;
▪ Pump trip replacement without interruption of operation;
▪ Control valve trip replacement;
▪ Manual pump or control valve replacement without interruption of operation;
▪ Automatic pump selection and manual pump pre selection;
▪ Manual and Automatic operation modes of control;
▪ Minimum Flow – and Pressure overrides, override shall be implemented with
a minimum selector (low select), status of the override shall be shown in the
HMIs of SCS and SCADA.
For each pump stations the design consultants shall develop a flow and pressure
control concept.
Pressure instruments for the controlled pressure by closed control loops shall be
installed in 2oo2 configuration.
10.3.7 ESD System SCS systems
Automatic shutdown functions shall be implemented within the SCSs. The design
consultants shall capture the automated shutdowns in Cause and Effect diagrams,
typical functions are:
▪ Pressure HH Pump shut downs;
▪ Vibration HH Pump shut downs;
▪ Tank Level HH Pump shut downs / Valve closure.
The MCC shall be notified in case of shut downs.
10.3.8 Maintenance Overrides for Fire Detectors
One hardwired key operated Maintenance Override Switch (MOS) shall be
provided at the F&G system cabinet for the fire detectors which can cause
automatic fire extinguishing. The hardwired switch allows activation of the software
overrides in the HMI for the individual fire detectors.
Activated maintenance override disables the related fire extinguishing logic. The
activation of the software MOS can only be done the by user “Maintenance”.
Activated MOS does not disables the alarming in the SCS HMI. Detectors with
MOS activated shall be marked in SCS and SCADA HMI. Individual alarms in the
local HMI and SCADA indicate when a MOS has been activated for a detector.
The MOS timer times out after 8 hours and can only be started once a day.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 122/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10.3.9 Communication System

10.3.9.1 Fibre Optic Cables


Fibre optic rings shall be utilized as per the “SCADA Concept Report’ reference
code TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-IC-BOD-00002.
The fibre optic cable shall be suitable for blowing in the cable conduit, function
properly and faultlessly under the specified environmental conditions. The outer
cladding of cable shall not be affected by severity of climate (e.g. to lose its
hardness during the cable blowing activity, when exposed to direct sun in summer
and affecting the progress of work).
The fiber optic cable shall be laid in parallel to the pipeline in buried cable conduits.
The fiber optic cable system shall be terminated in all stations (e.g. Control Centre,
Pumping Station) that are connected to the communication system. Therefore a
fully dielectric fiber optic cable suitable for ducted or direct buried applications, filled
with compound to prevent axial and longitudinal ingress of water and / or soluble
chemicals throughout the cable shall be provided. The cable shall have gel filled
loose tubes as secondary coating of fibers. The maximum number of loose tubes,
for the individual cable design, shall be applied without use of fillers. Each loose
tube shall contain the same number of fibers.
The cable shall contain a minimum number of 72 fibers.
Traction elements shall be made out of Kevlar or equivalent. The allowable tensile
loading of the cable shall be larger than 2.500 N, suitable for direct blowing or
pulling the cable into cable ducts.
The cable shall be protected against termite and rodent e.g. with a layer of glass
yarn or similar. The outer cladding of the cable shall consist out of black PE. Other
colour coding and labelling of the particular cable components shall be according
to IEC 60304. Further parameters of the FOC shall be according to the
requirements specified by the design consultants.
10.3.10 SCADA Systems
The schemes proposed for the distribution of TSE must be operated through a fully
functional SCADA System. The system must have at least the following
functionality:
▪ Process control and monitoring;
▪ Alarming and reporting;
▪ Trending and logging;
▪ Reservoir level monitoring;
▪ Equipment start, stop and condition monitoring;
▪ Pressure sensing;
▪ Flow monitoring;
▪ Water Quality Monitoring;
▪ Historical data base data;

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 123/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ Predictive demand forecasting;


▪ Redundancy for data transmission.
A fully functional SCADA system must be set up to operate a decentralized system
with package units.
For the SCADA system the following redundancy should be provided:
▪ Interface to workstations;
▪ Control network equipment;
▪ Control data highway communication systems;
▪ Controllers;
▪ Power supplies.
The system must comply with:
▪ Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements: The pump station control
system shall be designed to avoid interaction between associated electrical
circuits. Spurious signals that cause interference shall be suppressed,
preferably at source.
▪ Power Supply: All systems and instrumentation shall be supplied by
220 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase redundant Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
systems, with 4 hour battery back.
▪ I/O Design: All field instruments shall be smart, 24 V DC, 2-wire loop powered
type, where possible. Analog input and output modules shall be 4-20 mA DC
with HART-FSK.
▪ Condition Monitoring System (CMS) The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 124/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on


rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery. The
project shall provide condition monitoring system at pump station for all
applicable rotating equipment. The CMS/VMS shall provide automatic
vibration, displacement and temperature condition monitoring and protection
functions on rotating machinery. Monitoring and protection functions on
rotating machinery shall be based on the criticality of the machinery.

10.3.10.1 SCADA General Philosophy


Pump Stations will have their dedicated Station Control systems , controlling the
process. SCS and UCS are either combined in one SCS or distributed in a location.
and Unit Control Systems, controlling the process. SCS and UCS are either
combined in one SCS or distributed in a location.
A SCADA Main Control Centre (MCC) will be the central point of operation 24/7.
At Neighbourhood Tanks or selected TSE supply tie-in locations along the
secondary pipeline network the point of delivery will be established, which is the
interface where TSE bulk supply is handed over for distribution. This point
establishes the battery limit for the design consultants.
Each point of delivery must have a means of measuring or calculating the TSE
volume delivered on a daily basis and of shutting off flow mechanically. Both
devices must be tied into the SCADA system and the shut-off device must be able
to be controlled remotely.
For communication, three (3) fibre optic rings are proposed along the primary
pipeline network. Devices at the point of delivery are to be tied-in with fibre optic
cable along the Secondary Pipelines and connected to the nearest SCS/ MCC on
the primary ring. The necessity of a redundant communication link from point of
delivery to SCS/ MCC to be determined by design consultants. Redundancy can
only be omitted if no adverse impact arises from a breakdown in communication.
10.3.10.1.1 SCADA System Communication and Telephone System
For each LOT the design consultants shall:
▪ Establish redundant communication interfaces to the SCADA system in a FOC
ring. This includes laying of the FOC. The redundant A, B ring communication
shall make sure that a Fiber failure or FOC cut does not interrupt the
communication. Further Tie ins of existing SCADA systems shall be
considered.
▪ establish dedicated telephone connections to the MCC from each SCS. In
comparison to the public telephone system a dedicated telephone system for
the operation ensures a higher level of cyber security and availability and is
based on stations and not on people and therefore easier to administrate.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 125/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ establish Communication from the SCS systems to the neighbourhood tanks.


How this communication will be established shall be designed by the
consultants,
▪ GPRS, Landline or FOC connections can be used.
▪ In case of GPRS / Landline report on exception shall be used. That means a
live signal every 5min shall be provided by the remote station, status changes
shall be reported immediately with time stamp. Standard protocols (IEC
60870-5 part 104) shall be used for this application.
▪ The design consultants shall establish a telecom feasibility study how the
communication to the small locations can be done.
More information about the SCADA philosophy will be developed on the “SCADA
Concept Report’ reference code TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-IC-BOD-00002.
10.3.11 Process Control and Architecture
10.3.12 Flowmeters
Downstream of pumping stations the installation of the flow meters should be
considered, to measure the pumped flow.
▪ Electromagnetic flowmeters. They shall be connected to the pipe by means of
flanges, according to BS EN 1092-1, and shall always be installed, with a
disassembly reel for possible removal. They will be equipped of an element
(reel with coils and electrodes), with IP68 degree of protection, and its
corresponding converter electronics, both independent electronics of the
converter, both independent so that the latter can be installed in such a way
that it cannot be affected by possible flooding.
It is recommended minimum lengths of straight sections, in the case of
electromagnetic flowmeters, as follows:
» Inlet straight run: L > 5-DN;
» Straight outflow straight run: L > 3-DN.
In any case, these lengths shall be compatible with those provided by the
manufacturer.
▪ Ultrasonic flowmeters. Preferably installed for nominal pipe diameters greater
than 800 mm and flange connection, according to BS EN 1092-1. They shall
consist of a reel, a probe or transducer and the converter electronics. The
recommended minimum lengths of straight sections shall be variable
depending on the disturbance element, being considerably longer than for
electromagnetic ones. They shall have IP68 degree of protection. The
flowmeters should have calibration certificates.
It shall be considered the possibility of flowmeters location where an AC power
supply can be installed, and the ones where no external power supply is possible.
10.3.13 Pressure Sensors
Smart type pressure transmitters should be use for all applications. The
transmitters shall be connected to the PLC.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 126/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Pressure switches shall be of the bourbon tube, spiral, helical, bellows or


diaphragm type, depending upon the application requirements. The pressure
sensing element shall be of AISI 316 SS. Pressure switches shall withstand the
maximum pressure of the system to which it is connected.
Set point for pressure switches shall be adjustable throughout the operating range.
Pressure switches shall have ½" NPT (F) process connection.
Pressure switches generally be used for "ON-OFF" applications.
Pressure gauges shall be 4½ inches (100 mm) in diameter and shall be white with
black numerals and shall be fitted with safety glass and over range blow out
protection.
10.3.14 Level
For continuous liquid level measurement the ultrasonic type is the preferred
method. The sensor shall be capable for measuring the establish process range.
The probe shall be provided with a built-in temperature sensor for the
compensation of sound velocity.
Smart type level transmitters should be use for all applications. The transmitters
shall be connected to the PLC. The transmitter shall include an integral indicator.
Level switches shall be float or displacer operated and shall have high quality snap-
acting double pole double throw micro switch type.
10.3.15 Temperature
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) for temperature sensing applications.
The transmitters shall be connected to the PLC.
Thermowells shall be tapered, flanged, and not screwed and machined from AISI
316 SS stainless steel bar stock. Flange size shall be 1½ inch, minimum 300 lb
flange for process pipe and 2 inch, minimum 300 lb for vessels. The design shall
ensure that all thermowells are suitable to resist stress due to maximum stream
velocity conditions (vortex shedding effect).
10.3.16 Motor Operated Valves
Motor Operated Valves (MOVs) shall be used to provide isolation on large process
lines (larger than 300 mm) where use of manually operated hand valves would be
impractical. These shall be identified as Instrument Type “MOV”. These valves are
either controlled by the PLC or locally operated manually by the process operator.
The design of the MOVs shall provide the ability to test them in-service using partial
or full stroke testing.
10.3.17 TSE Quality Monitoring

10.3.17.1 TSE Reuse Regulations


The TSE quality data are assessed based on the following standard:
▪ Executive Regulation for Treated Sewage Water and its Reuse, Royal decree
No. M/6 dated 13/2/1421H; Implementing Regulations for water and

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 127/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

wastewater treatment were published in the Official Gazette on 30/3/1427H


(2006G).
A further differentiation is made based on the type of irrigation:
▪ Unrestricted irrigation includes irrigation of public parks, playgrounds and
other public areas; irrigation of human food crops potentially consumed raw;
▪ Restricted irrigation includes irrigation of green belts, plants and trees in road
medians; other agricultural crops.
Table 45 shows the TSE quality monitoring parameter for unrestricted and
restricted reuse imposed by the “Treated Sanitary Wastewater and Its Reuse
Regulations” Royal Decree No. M/6 dated 13/2/1421H.
Table 45: Imposed TSE Quality Monitoring Parameter of Royal Decree No, M/6
Parameter Unit Unrestricted Restricted
Physico-chemical characteristics
10 (monthly av.)
BOD5 40 (monthly av.)
15 (monthly av.)
mg/l
10 (monthly av.)
TSS 40 (monthly av.)
15 (monthly av.)
pH 6 – 8.4 6 – 8.4
Turbidity NTU 5 5
TDS 2,500 2,500
Ammonia (NH3-N) 5 5
Nitrate (NO3-N) 10 10
mg/l 0.5 (not less than
Free Chlorine 0.5
0.2)
Phenol 0.002 0.002
Oil and Grease nil nil
Microbiological characteristics
2.2 (weekly av.) 1,000 (monthly
Fecal Coliform
23 (in any sample) av.)
Intestinal
Viable eggs/l 1 1
Nematodes
Heavy Metals / Trace Elements
Aluminium 5 5
Arsenic 0.1 0.1
Barium 2
Beryllium 0.1 0.1
Boron 0.75 0.75
Cadmium 0.01 0.01
Chromium 0.1 0.1
Cobalt 0.05 0.05
Copper mg/l 0.4 0.4
Fluoride 1 1
Iron 5 5
Lead 0.1 0.1
Lithium 2.5 2.5
Manganese 0.2 0.2
Mercury 0.001 0.001
Molybdenum 0.01 0.01
Nickel 0.2 0.2

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 128/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Parameter Unit Unrestricted Restricted


Selenium 0.02 0.02
Vanadium 0.1 0.1
Zinc 4 4
Some parameter such as BOD5, TSS, E.coli, intestinal nematodes, and free
chlorine (representative of chlorination efficiency) are very stringent and it is
responsibility of the WWTPs operator to adhere strictly to the limit imposed.
To provide more flexibility for the reuse of the TSE, it is necessary to adhere to the
more stringent limitations, namely the ones imposed for unrestricted reuse.
In addition to the imposed standards from the Royal Decree No. M/6, the TSE
Reuse Masterplan has also defined more stringent threshold values in regards to
the TDS. By taking in consideration the different requirements of the parks and of
the irrigation areas, the MP proposed the following subdivision in categories, based
on maximal TDS concentration permitted:
▪ Category A ≤ 2,000 ppm – Natural Areas and Others
» Wadis
» Natural parks (city parks)
» Green belt / Utility corridors
» Empty plots
▪ Category B ≤ 1,500 ppm – Open spaces related to buildings
» Governmental
» Mosque
▪ Category C ≤ 1,000 ppm – Parks/ Other open spaces related to buildings
» Urban Parks (city parks), such as Al Arubah park
» Neighbourhood parks (existing and future)
Such categorization has been provided based on specific trees and plants
requirements of each irrigation area. In addition these sensitive categories are
widely scattered across the city.

10.3.17.2 TSE Monitoring Strategy


Based on the limit imposed, the Contractor shall monitor the TSE entering the
network at the level of the primary mains, before that the TSE enters the Strategic
Tanks.
This monitoring point shall be positioned in a convenient location, in the immediate
vicinity of the WWTP, so that in case of non-compliance, the TSE could be easily
re-directed either back towards the WWTP or discharged in open channels.
It is necessary to monitor at least the following parameters by means of online
sensors:
▪ Conductivity (representative of TDS)
▪ pH
▪ Turbidity

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 129/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ TSS
▪ BOD
▪ Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N)
▪ Nitrate (NO3-N)
▪ Residual Chlorine
A feasible instrumentation able to obtain online measurements shall be considered
and in case of non-compliance of these parameters with the unrestricted TSE
reuse regulation, a notification system shall be provided in order to impose an
automatic shutdown, avoiding the contamination of the Strategic Tanks and of the
TSE network.
In addition to the online measurements, daily samples shall be taken at the first
monitoring point in the immediate vicinity of the WWTP, as well as within the
Strategic Tanks, prior to the distribution to the Secondary Mains and to the
Neighbourhood Tanks.
It is understood that TSE originating from different WWTPs, may be collected and
mixed in common Strategic Tanks. The mixing of different TSE sources within the
Strategic Tanks could be beneficial to promote further dilution of eventual TSE
streams, which may be characterized by higher concentration of certain
parameters.
The daily sample shall be analyzed in a laboratory and the sampling strategy shall
be performed accordingly to the one described in the following table:
Table 46: TSE Sampling Strategy
Parameter Sample Frequency, Type Compliance requirement
No more than two (2) samples
Biochemical Oxygen
Daily,24-hour composite per month may exceed the
Demand, 5-day (BOD5)
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Total Suspended Solids
Daily,24-hour composite per month may exceed the
(TSS)
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Total Dissolved Solids
Daily,24-hour composite per month may exceed the
(TDS)
standard
Average of daily samples
Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-
Daily,24-hour composite during a month may not
N)
exceed the standard
Average of daily samples
Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N) Daily, 24-hour composite during a month may not
exceed the standard
Average of daily samples
Total Nitrogen (TN) Daily, 24-hour composite during a month may not
exceed the standard
No more than two (2) samples
Total Phosphorous (TP) Daily, 24-hour composite per month may exceed the
standard

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 130/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Parameter Sample Frequency, Type Compliance requirement


Average of daily samples
Oil & Grease (O&G) Daily, Grab Sample during a month may not
exceed the standard
No daily samples may be
pH Daily, 24-hour composite
outside the standard range
No more than two (2) samples
Fecal Coliform Daily, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Total Coliform Daily, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Nematodes (eggs) Weekly, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Viable Helminths Ova Weekly, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Phenol Weekly, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (2) samples
Heavy Metals Weekly, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard
No more than two (5) samples
Residual Chlorine Daily, Grab Sample per month may exceed the
standard

Notes applicable to the above standards:


▪ Composite sample means a flow-proportioned composite sample collected
over 24 hours;
▪ All sampling, sample preservation, and analytical testing shall be conducted in
accordance with “Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater” (21st Edition) or other internationally-recognized authority
approved by RCRC;
▪ All analyses for compliance testing shall be performed by a laboratory which
is accredited to ISO 17025:2005 “General Requirements for the Competence
of Calibration and Testing Laboratories”.

10.4 Instrumentation for Security


10.4.1 General
The main buildings and facilities as the Control Building, the Warehouse Building,
the Workshop Building and the Pumping houses requires security measures.
The first measures for all these facilities will be security fences. The perimeter
should be also well illuminated. The type and configuration of the fence should be
developed by the design consultants.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 131/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

10.5 CCTV at Pump Stations


CCTV) shall be provided to oversee the inside of a pump station, as a minimum 4
cameras shall be installed. CCTV coverage shall be proven by the design
consultants via coverage study.
Remote operation of cameras shall be possible in the guard house. High
sophisticated state of the art CCTV cameras with night vision and 24 hour storage
shall be provided. All the video surveillance should be developed by the design
consultants.

10.6 Access Control and Intruder Detection System


For all pump stations and neighbourhood stations access control and intruder
detection system is required.
Access control and intruder detection systems are required for all buildings.
Windows and building access doors shall be supervised by the system.
Alarms shall be relayed to the MCC for the SCADA control system.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 132/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

11 FIRE FIGHTING PHILOSOPHY


11.1 General
The Fire Fighting (FF) philosophy considers:
▪ Layout constraints and requirement, unrestricted access of fire fighting forces;
▪ Fire Detection, for buildings;
▪ Active fire protection electrical equipment rooms;
▪ Passive fire protection, Fire Zones in buildings;
▪ Alarm systems (manual and automatic);
▪ List of standard and national laws to be referenced.
Detailed FF philosophies shall be developed by the Design Consultants.

11.2 Level of Protection – Fire Detection


Conventional fire detection is required for all rooms and room voids, such as false
floors and suspended ceilings. 2oo2 Fire detectors shall trigger the clean agent fire
extinguishing system.
Additionally High Sensitive Smoke Detection (HSSD) ) shall be provided for
electrical and control equipment cabinets for early warning.
Central fire detection alarm panels shall be provided in the control building. A fire
alarm information panel shall be in the guard houses.
Fire Detection of packaged equipment, e.g. Diesel Generators, shall be integrated
in the central fire detection system of a station.
Common Fire alarms of a station shall be relayed to the MCC SCADA system. The
MCC SCADA operators will notify the fire brigade.

11.3 Level of Protection – Fire Fighting


▪ For pump stations, a sprinkler system shall be installed in work shop buildings
and ware houses.
▪ Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every building and room;
▪ For neighbourhood locations automatic fire fighting is not foreseen;
▪ Public fire brigade shall have access to water on each station. Hydrants shall
be provided accordingly;
▪ Public fire brigade shall be alarmed to fight fire in stations via MCC SCADA
operators. The MCC is manned 24/7, every location is equipped with fire
detection (see chapter below). Detected fire will be alarmed via SCADA in the
MCC;
▪ Pump houses will not have automatic fire extinguishing;
▪ For pump stations a clean agent fire extinguishing systems shall be provided
to protect electrical equipment rooms, such as MCC-rooms, control equipment

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 133/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

rooms and battery rooms. Dedicated bottle rooms for the clean agent shall be
provided. NOVEC is the preferred extinguishing agent. In the extinguishing
zone negative pressure occurs briefly when flooding begins. During the
flooding process the pressure increases – excess pressure occurs. For the
proper function of the fire suppression system and to avoid structural damage
in the protected enclosure, negative pressure and excess pressure must be
dissipated from the extinguishing zone via a pressure relief device.

11.4 Support for Local Fire Fighting Forces


The local Fire Fighting forces shall be supported.
▪ 24/7 access to facilities:
» For all larger facilities security personnel will provided access to the site
and
» For small sites (neighbourhoods) maintenance personal from the
company will enable access for FF.
▪ Fire engine access way and fire engine access roads shall be provided to
ensure site accessibility for firefighting appliances;
▪ Involvement of local FF authorities during the design phase.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 134/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

12 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
Drinking water for those facilities that require it, will be supplied in through the
existing water distribution network if possible. The designer must verify that the
water network has the capacity to supply the service to the facility. If this is not
possible, it will be supplied through tanker trucks to tanks located in the vicinity of
the facility. Storage tanks should have a minimum capacity of 1 week, estimated
on the base of the water requirements. In both cases the designer must complete
the designs to supply the facility.
Electricity will be supplied in the first instance from the electrical power line closest
to the facility. The designer will validate that the existing network has sufficient
capacity to supply the service. The electrical wiring from the nearest network must
be carried out by the designer. For temporary works, the use of power plants can
be considered, which can later serve as back-up to the facilities.
If wastewater is generated, the designer should consider the connection of the
facility to the wastewater network of the area. In the event that the area does not
have wastewater network, the designer should design the collection, transport and
treatment for the wastewater.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 135/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

13 TSE QUALITY IMPROVEMENTS FACILITIES


In order to improve the quality of the TSE, treatment plants can be used to carry
out a tertiary treatment of the WWTP effluents or tertiary treatments that should be
use to polished the water quality to reach the quality required for irrigation.
As far as possible, these treatment systems should be located close to the sources
of TSE.
Package or modular systems can be considered in the design for the TSE
treatment solutions, being the characteristics of these systems dependent on the
quality of the TSE to be treated and the final use of the treated effluent.
The designer must provide the best technical-economical treatment option
according to the TSE inflow quality to the treatment system.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 136/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

14 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


14.1 General
This section presents the main environmental regulations according to the Saudi
regulations that should be considered during the design of the different facilities.

14.2 Noise Regulations


The standards in this section have been referenced from the following regulation
and guidance documents:
▪ PME, Environmental Standards, Environmental Noise (Effective Date
24/03/2012)
The following table sets out the PME (2012) environmental noise requirements
regarding community noise and is broken down by the sensitivity of the community
and the time of day.
Table 47: PME 2012 - Free Field External Noise Limits for Community Noise
Day Evening Night
Designation
(Leq(A)) (Leq(A) (Leq(A))
A - Sensitive 50 45 40
B - Mixed 55 50 45
C - Non-sensitive 60 55 50
Further to the above, it is outlined that individual noise events at night shall not
exceed 60 dB A (Lmax) at the nearest sensitive property. It is also noted that where
a noise sensitive property physically adjoins an industrial or commercial source,
the noise level should be at least 10 dB (A) less than the figures above.
The following table sets out the PME (2012) limits for external noise limits in
industrial areas and is broken down per type of industry.
Table 48: Industrial Units in ‘Industrial Areas’ - Maximum Permissible Free-field Noise Levels
Day Evening Night
Designation
(Leq(A)) (Leq(A) (Leq(A))
A1 – Retail 55 50 45
A2 – Warehousing 55 50 45
A3 – Light Industrial
55 50 45
(in residential areas)
A4 – Medium Density Industry 65 60 50
A5 – High Density Industry 75 65 55
Individual noise events shall not exceed 70 dB (LAmax) during the night as is
measured at the façade of the nearest noise sensitive property.
The compliance of designed fixed installation responsible for emitting noise during
the operations, i.e., pumping stations, shall be verified by calculating the emission
noise levels at the nearest receptors.

14.3 Air Quality Regulations


The standards have been referenced from the following regulation and guidance
documents:

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 137/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

▪ PME, Environmental Standards, Ambient Air Quality (Effective Date


24/03/2012)
The main air pollution sources during the operation of the plant consists of vehicles
and fixed engines, which are covered in the following tables.
Table 49: Non-Road Petrol (Compression-Ignition) Engines (includes industrial equipment)
CO HC NOx PM
Rated Power Smoke %
(g/kW-hr) (g/kW- hr) (g/kWhr) (g/kW- hr)
50 ≤ HP < 100 n/a n/a 9.25 (ABT) n/a 20/15/50
100 ≤ HP < 175 n/a n/a 9.25 (ABT) n/a 20/15/50
175 ≤ HP < 750 11.4 1.34 9.25 (ABT) 0.54 20/15/50
HP = 750+ 11.4 1.34 9.25 (ABT) 0.54 20/15/50
Table 50: Non-Road Diesel (Spark-ignition Engines) (lawn-mowers, forklifts, generators)
CO
HC NOx HC + NOx
Rated Power (g/kW-
(g/kW- hr) (g/kWhr) (g/kW- hr)
hr)
< 225 cc
518.97 n/a n/a n/a
(non-handheld)
≥ 225 cc
518.97 n/a n/a n/a
(non-handheld)
< 20 cc
804.6 295.02 5.36 0.54
(handheld)
≥ 20 cc > 50 cc
804.6 241.38 5.36 n/a
(handheld)
≥ 50 cc
603.45 160.92 5.36 n/a
(handheld)

14.4 Wastewater/ TSE Treatment Effluents


The standards in this section have been referenced from the following regulation
and guidance documents:
▪ “Rules of Implementations for the Regulations of Treated Sanitary Wastewater
and its Reuse”, Ministry Water and Electricity, 2000;
▪ PME, Environmental Standards, Industrial and Municipal Wastewater
Discharges.
The treated sewage water reused in agriculture irrigation must be in conformity
with the standardized criteria and the terms described in the rules of
Implementations for the Regulations of Treated Sanitary Wastewater and its
Reuse.
Each irrigation system that uses the treated sewage water and all systems that
transport such water must have boards fixed in places to be identified by the
competent authority that says: “Caution: treated sewage water. For irrigation only"
The treated sewage water allocated to irrigate public gardens, parks, playgrounds,
and other places intended for public must be of tertiary treatment and must conform
with the criteria described in Table 51. It must be irrigated at times that differ from
those dedicated to the public.
If the Detail Design will include tertiary treatments plants, these shall be designed
considering the provisions of the Environmental Standards on Industrial and

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 138/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Municipal Wastewater Discharges and the Regulations of Treated Sanitary


Wastewater and its Reuse.
Among other, the Environmental Standards on Industrial and Municipal
Wastewater Discharges prescribes that All facilities discharging directly to the
environment shall have storage capacity to retain 36 hours of total wastewater
production, excluding uncontaminated cooling or process water in a pond that is
lined with an impervious liner (30 mil HDPE or better). Wastewater retained in such
facilities shall be regularly discharged so that the ponds are kept empty under
normal operating conditions to provide containment for emergencies and to
minimize fugitive emissions.
The Rules of Implementations for the Regulations of Treated Sanitary Wastewater
and its Reuse set out the standards of treated sewage water use for unrestricted
irrigation.
For the use of water from tertiary treatment for unrestricted irrigation purposes, the
properties and standards are sat out in the following Table 51, in addition to the
standards determined by the Ministry of Agriculture (Total Dissolved Solids TDS
< 2,500 ppm).
Sewage water from tertiary treatment, in which the total dissolved salt
concentration exceeds the limits indicated in Table 51, might be used if it can be
mixed with less saline water or used for the irrigation of saline-resistant crops.
Table 51: Maximum Pollution Levels of Tertiary Treated Sewage Water
Maximum Pollution Level
Properties
(mg/L)
Floating Materials Void
Physical Total Suspended Solids
(A) 10
Properties TSS
pH 6 - 8.4
Biological Oxygen
(A) 10
Demand BOD5
Organic Chemical
Turbidity 5.00 (Turbidity Unit)
Properties
Oil & Grease Non
Phenols 0.002
Number of Fecal Coliform 2.2 (B) (Number/100 ml)
Bacterial
Intestinal worm eggs 1 living egg cel
Properties
number (Number/Liter)
Nitrates NO3 – N Nitrate 10.0
Ammonia (NH3 –N) 5.0
Aluminum Al 5.0
Arsenic As 0.1
Beryllium Be 0.1
Chemical Boron B 0.75
Compound Cadmium Cd 0.01
Properties Free Chlorine Cl2 0.5 (+)
Chromium Cr 0.1
Cobalt Co 0.05
Copper Cu 0.4
Fluoride F 1
Iron Fe 5.0

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 139/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

Lead Pb 0.1
Lithium Li 2.5
Manganese Mn 0.2
Mercury 0.001
Molybdenum Mo 0.01
Nickel Ni 0.2
Selenium Se 0.02
Vanadium V 0.1
Zinc Zn 4.0
Notes:
(A-1) The monthly average for each TSS, BOD5 shall not exceed 10 mg/liter.
(A-2) The weekly average for each TSS, BOD5 shall not exceed 15 mg/liter.
(B) The treated sewage water is considered sanitized to a non-contagious
degree and sufficient for use in unrestricted irrigation if the maximum possible
number (MPN) of the fecal coliform does not exceed 2.2 for each 100 mm (or
its equivalent in other measurement methods) in accordance with bacteria test
findings within a week. In addition, it shall not exceed 23 for each 100 mm in
any sample (or its equivalent in other measurement methods).
(+) Not less than 0.2 mg/liter in the case of chlorine used in sanitization.

14.5 Waste
The “General Environmental Regulations and Rules for Implementation” stipulates
the environmental requirements regarding waste and hazardous waste, as well as
related issues which are set forth in Articles 13 and 14 of the regulation. Some
relevant requirements include:
▪ Prevent direct or indirect contamination of surface, ground and coastal waters
that may be caused by solid or liquid residues.
▪ Prevent the discharge, in any quantity, of any type of solid or liquid wastes,
substance, element, organic or inorganic compound that may be classified as
hazardous into surface, ground or coastal waters
▪ All agencies and persons shall comply with local regulations, standards,
guidelines, and instructions concerning the production, exchange, storage,
treatment, recycling and transportation of hazardous, toxic or radioactive
wastes.
▪ No persons or agencies may dispose of chemical, toxic, hazardous, or
radioactive materials without a license from the PME.
▪ The disposal or discharge of any harmful pollutants, poisonous, hazardous, or
radioactive wastes are prohibited in the territorial waters or the free economic
zone.
In addition, the rules, and procedures to control hazardous wastes are specified in
Appendix 4 of the “General Environmental Regulations and Rules for
Implementation”.
The detail design shall identify the project components which may responsible to
produce substantial waste both non-hazardous and hazardous, during construction
and operation, and include provisions, such as temporary storage areas, to enable
the management of the waste according to the requirements above.

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 140/141


TSE Supply For Green Riyadh Program
Project Management and Coordination
BASIS OF DESIGN
12.01.2022

APPENDICES
Appendix 1: TSE System Schematic

TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-BOD-00001-R01.docx | Revision 01 | © Page 141/141


Notes Legend
01-PS17
1 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
1 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
1 02-WT15 1
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

1 Operational Mode 1 – Normal Operation

01-PM02-PSV100

1
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05

1
1

1 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
1

02-PS05

1
CON PZ 4
02-WT12 Wadi
01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines
02-PM01-PSV200 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description

1
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
01-PS01 01-PM01
NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
1

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
1 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
1 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
1

1
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 1a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
03-BPT-05 1a 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
1b 1b 03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
1b PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
2 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
2 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
2 02-WT15 2
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

2 Operational Mode 2

01-PM02-PSV100

2
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

2
CON PZ 3
2
02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05

2 01-WT09
01-PS09
2

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
2

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


2 02-WT12 Wadi 2 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

2
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
2 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
2 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
2

2
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 2a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
2a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
2b 03-BPT-05 2b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
2b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
3 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
3 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
3a 02-WT15 3
3b 01-PM05-PSV200
Temporary

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

3 Operational Mode 3

01-PM02-PSV100

3
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

3
CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
3

01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03

02-PS05

CON PZ 4
02-WT12 Wadi
01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines
02-PM01-PSV200 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description

3
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
01-PS01 01-PM01
NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
3

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
3 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
3 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
3b

3
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 3 WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
3a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
03-WT02
03-BPT-05 03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
4 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
4 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
4 02-WT15 4
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2
4 Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

4 Operational Mode 4

01-PM02-PSV100

02-PM02 CON PZ 2

4
CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
4

4 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
4

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 4 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

4
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
4 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
4

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
4 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
4 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
4

4
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PM01-PSV002 03-PS02 WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
4 03-BPT-05 4 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
4 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
5 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
5 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
02-WT15 5
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

5 Operational Mode 5

01-PM02-PSV100

5
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

5
CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
5

5 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
5

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 5 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

5
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
5 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
5

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
5 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
5 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
5

5
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 5a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
5a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
5b 03-BPT-05 5b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
5b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
6 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
6 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
6 02-WT15 6
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

6 Operational Mode 6

01-PM02-PSV100

6
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05

6 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
6

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 6 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

6
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
6 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
6

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
6 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
6 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
6

6
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 6a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
6a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
6b 03-BPT-05 6b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
6b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
7 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
7 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
7 02-WT15 7
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

7 Operational Mode 7

01-PM02-PSV100

7
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
7

7 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
7

02-PS05

CON PZ 4
02-WT12 Wadi
01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines
02-PM01-PSV200 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description

7
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
7 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
7

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
7 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
7 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
7

7
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 7a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
7a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
7b 03-BPT-05 7b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
7b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
8 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
8 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
8 02-WT15 8
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

8 Operational Mode 8

01-PM02-PSV100

8
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
8

8 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
8

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 8 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

8
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
8 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
8

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
8 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
8 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
8

8
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 8a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
8a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
8b 03-BPT-05 8b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
8b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
9 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
9 02-WT15 9
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

9 Operational Mode 9

01-PM02-PSV100

9
02-PM02 CON PZ 2

9
CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
9

9 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
9

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 9 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description
02-PM01-PSV200

9
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
9 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
01-PS13
9

CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
9 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
9 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
9

9
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 9a WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
9a WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
9b 03-BPT-05 9b 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
9b 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
10 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
10 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
10 02-WT15 10
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

10 Operational Mode 10

01-PM02-PSV100

10
02-PM02

10
CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
10

10 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
10

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 10 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description

10
02-PM01-PSV200
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
10 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
10

01-PS13
CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
10 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
10 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)

10
02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12
02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 10 WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
10 03-BPT-05 10 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
10 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.
Notes Legend
01-PS17
11 01-WT04
To Sodous Not in Scope: 0X-PS11
01-PS06 WWTP, Wastewater Treatment Plant
0X-PS12
01-PM06
11 01-WT17 PSV, Pressure Sustaining Valve
CON PZ 3
01-PS15 Optional Expansion – to be discussed

Phase 1 (Fast Track)

02-PM01-PSV400 01-PS16
Phase 2

02-PS08 02-PM03-PSV002 02-PM01-PSV003 01-PM04 Phase 3


02-WT10
02-PM03
11 02-WT15 11
Temporary
01-PM05-PSV200

8xCON PZ 7 NWC Planned/ designed


02-PM02-PSV001 CON PZ 2

Bi-directional Flow
02-PS07 02-PS10 01-PM04-PSV100

11 Operational Mode 11

01-PM02-PSV100

11
02-PM02

11
CON PZ 2

CON PZ 3

02-PM02-PSV300 01-PM05
11

11 01-WT09
01-PS09

03-PM02-PSV001

01-PM03 01-PS03
01-PM07

01-WT03
11

02-PS05

CON PZ 4 01-PS02 01-PM02 Tagging of Locations and Primary Pipelines


02-WT12 Wadi 11 1-Tag Master Plan 2-Tag 3-Description

11
02-PM01-PSV200
02-PS04
NWC S2-1200 01-PM01 Primary Main from PS-NWC-01
11 NWC S2-1200 01-PM02 Primary Main from PS-NWC-02
01-PS01 01-PM01
01-PM03 Primary Main from WT13 to WT09
01-PM04 Primary Main from 01-WT09 to 02-WT15
11

01-PS13
CON PZ 4 to be discussed NWC S2-1200 01-PM05 Primary Main from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
to be discussed 01-PM06 Primary Main from 02-WT15 to 01-WT17
02-PM01-PSV100 PS-NWC-01 01-PS01 NWC PS (Manfouha) to Sodous
01-WT13 PS-NWC-02 01-PS02 NWC PS (Manfouha) to 01-WT17
01-PS14 to be dicussed 01-PS03 PS from 01-WT03 to 01-WT17
11 PS-RCRC-09 01-PS09 PS at Strategic Reservoir
02-PM01 01-PS13 PS at Manfouha WWTP to 01-WT09
PS-RCRC-14 01-PS14 PS at Manfouha WWTP
11 CON PZ 1 to be discussed 01-PS15 PS to 02-WT15
to be discussed 01-PS16 PS to 01-WT17
03-PM02-PSV100
to be discussed 01-PS17 PS to Sodus
to be discussed 01-WT03 Strategic Tank for PZ 7
WT-RCRC-09 at Cement Factory 01-WT09 Strategic Reservoir Ministry of Health
WT-RCRC-13 01-WT13 Pump Sump Manfouha WWTP
03-PM02 WT-RCRC-17 01-WT17 Zone 6 Reservoir (Airport Park)
11

02-PM01 Primary Main from WT13 to WT12


02-PM02 Primary Main from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
03-PM01 02-PM03 Primary Main from 02-PM02 to 02-WT15
PS-RCRC-04 02-PS04 PS from 02-WT12 to PZ4
PS-RCRC-xx 02-PS05 PS from 02-WT12 to 02-WT10
PS-RCRC-07 02-PS07 PS to WT_RCRC_07(Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-08 02-PS08 PS to WT_RCTC_15 (Zone 3)
PS-RCRC-10 02-PS10 PS to Zone 2
03-PS02
03-PM01-PSV002 11 WT-RCRC-10 02-WT10 Strategic Storage - Al Arubah Park
WT-RCRC-12 02-WT12 Water Tower 12
WT-RCRC-15 02-WT15 Zone 2 Reservoir (King Salman Park)
03-PM04-PSV001
BPT-RCRC-05 03-BPT-05 Break Pressure Tank in Zone 1
11 03-BPT-05 11 03-WT02
03-PM01 Primary Main from 03-WT01 to 01-WT13
03-PM04 03-PM03 03-PS03
Twin Pipline 03-PM02 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-WT09
03-PM03 Primary Main from 03-WT02 to 01-BPT05
11 03-PM04 Primary Main from 01-BPT05 to 03-PM01
PS-RCRC-01 03-PS01 PS from 03-WT01 to 03PM01 and 03PM04
PS-RCRC-02 03-PS02 PS at Heet WWTP
03-PS01 PS-RCRC-03 03-PS03 PS at Heet WWTP
WT-RCRC-01 03-WT01 Pump Sump Al Hair WWTP
WT-RCRC-02 03-WT02 Heet WWTP
03-WT01 PS-RCRC-11 0X-PS11 PS North WWTP
PS-RCRC-12 0X-PS12 PS East WWTP
Client: Project: Consultant: Document Name:
Green Riyadh TSE Network Schematic – Primary
TSE Supply for Green Riyadh System
01 Updated for Review 28.11.2021 MI MH DC Programme
Royal Commission for Riyadh Document No.:
00 Issued for Review 29.10.2021 MH MI DC City PMC and Design Coordination ILF Consulting Engineers TSE-G-GN-00-ILF-G-EN-PLN-00002
Rev. Issue or Revision Date Prep. Check Appr.

You might also like